2016 BMW x5 83039 PDF

Contents Owner's Manual
for Vehicle
A-Z The Ultimate

Driving Machine®
THE BMW X5.

OWNER'S MANUAL.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 963 410 - VI/15

X5 Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in
the appendix of the printed Owner's Handbook for Vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride
BMW AG
The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.

Additional information on the Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide

© 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VI/15, 07 15 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Mobility
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 208 Refueling
page 264. 210 Fuel
215 Wheels and tires
229 Engine compartment
6 Information
232 Engine oil
At a glance 236 Coolant
14 Cockpit 238 Maintenance
18 iDrive 240 Replacing components
26 Voice activation system 248 Breakdown assistance
29 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 254 Care
Controls Reference
34 Opening and closing 260 Technical data
52 Adjusting 263 Appendix
64 Transporting children safely 264 Everything from A to Z
69 Driving
85 Displays
104 Lights
109 Safety
137 Driving stability control systems
145 Driving comfort
167 Climate control
174 Interior equipment
183 Storage compartments
Driving tips
192 Things to remember when driving
196 Loading
199 Saving fuel

Information
Information
Using this Owner's Manual Symbols and displays
Orientation Symbols in the Owner's Manual
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Indicates precautions that must be followed
ular topic is by using the index. precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in personal injury and serious damage to the
the first chapter. vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
Updates made after the editorial information.
deadline Refers to measures that can be taken to
Any updates made after the editorial deadline help protect the environment.
can be found in the appendix of the printed "..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to
Owner's Handbook for Vehicle. select individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
User's manual for Navigation,
activation system.
Entertainment, Communication
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
voice activation system.
munication and the short commands of the
voice activation system are described in a sep‐
arate user's manual, which is also included
Action steps
with the onboard literature. Action steps to be carried out are presented as
numbered list. The steps must be carried out
in the defined order.
Additional sources of 1. First action step.
information 2. Second action step.
A dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop will be glad to an‐ Enumerations
swer additional questions at any time. Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is ternative possibilities are presented as list with
available on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com. bullet points.
▷ First possibility.
BMW Driver’s Guide App ▷ Second possibility.
The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
tries as an app. Additional information on the Symbols on vehicle components
Internet: Indicates that you should consult the
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
6
Information
Vehicle features and options Own safety

This Owner's Manual describes all models and
Warranty
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series. Your vehicle is technically configured for the
Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also de‐ operating conditions and registration require‐
scribe and illustrate features that are not avail‐ ments applying in the country of first delivery
able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ also known as homologation. If your vehicle is
lected optional features or the country-specific to be operated in a different country it might be
version. necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially
differing operating conditions and permit re‐
This also applies to safety-related functions
quirements. If your vehicle does not comply
and systems.
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐
The respectively applicable country provisions tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐
must be observed when using the respective ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐
features and systems. formation on warranty is available from a
For any options and equipment not described dealer’s service center.
in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Handbooks. Maintenance and repairs
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
are arranged differently from what is shown in materials and high-performance electronics,
the illustrations. requires suitable maintenance and repair work.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
Status of the Owner's a BMW dealer’s service center. If you choose
Manual to use another service facility, BMW recom‐
mends use of a facility that performs work, e.g.
Basic information maintenance and repair, according to BMW
specifications with properly trained personnel,
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
referred to in this Owner's Manual as "another
policy of constant development that is con‐
qualified service center or repair shop".
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐ If work is performed improperly, e.g. mainte‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐ nance and repair, there is a risk of subsequent
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from damage and related safety risks.
those in your vehicle.
Parts and accessories
Updates made after the editorial BMW recommends the use of parts and ac‐
deadline cessory products approved by BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline Approved parts and accessories, and advice
can be found in the appendix of the printed on their use and installation are available from
Owner's Handbook for Vehicle. a BMW dealer's service center.
BMW parts and accessories were tested by
BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW
vehicles.
7
Information
BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐ Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
sories. Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
BMW does not evaluate whether each individ‐ Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
ual product from another manufacturer can be designed to meet the particular operating con‐
used with BMW vehicles without presenting a ditions and homologation requirements in your
safety hazard, even if a country-specific official country and continental region in order to de‐
approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
whether these products are suitable for BMW is operated under those conditions. If you wish
vehicles under all usage conditions. to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
California Proposition 65 Warning hicle to meet different prevailing operating
California laws require us to state the following conditions and homologation requirements.
warning: You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
country or region. In such case, please contact
bile components and parts, including compo‐
Customer Relations for further information.
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
Maintenance
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition, Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain road safety, operational reliability and the New
products of component wear contain or emit Vehicle Limited Warranty.
chemicals known to the State of California to Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ ures:
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ ▷ BMW Maintenance system
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
for US models
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and Canadian models
water. If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
Service and warranty ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
We recommend that you read this publication not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐ Warranty.
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
Data memory
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐ Many electronic components on your vehicle
ranty. are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐ and faults. This technical information generally
ited Warranty. records the state of a component, a module, a
Detailed information about these warranties is system or the environment:
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
8
Information
▷ Operating mode of system components, fill tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
levels for instance. a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐ The EDR is designed to record data related to
tion speed/vehicle speed, deceleration, vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
transverse acceleration. short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
tem components, e.g., lights and brakes. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐ ▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
ing the stability control system. operating.
▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature. ▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
This data is purely technical in nature and is
used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐ ▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
routes traveled cannot be created from this ▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐ These data can help provide a better under‐
pair services, service processes, warranty standing of the circumstances in which
claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐ crashes and injuries occur.
mation can be read out from the event and
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
fault memories by employees of the dealer’s
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are
service center or another qualified service cen‐
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
ter or repair shop, including the manufacturer,
conditions and no personal data, e.g., name,
using special diagnostic tools. You can obtain
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
further information there if you need it. After an
error is corrected, the information in the fault However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
memory is deleted or overwritten on a continu‐ ment, could combine the EDR data with the
ous basis. type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
With the vehicle in use there are situations
where you can associate these technical data To read data recorded by an EDR, special
with individuals if combined with other infor‐ equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
the assistance of an expert. enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
Additional functions that are contractually
the vehicle or the EDR.
agreed with the customer - such as vehicle
emergency locating - you can transmit certain
vehicle data from the vehicle.
Event Data Recorder EDR

This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
9
Information
Vehicle identification formation about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.
number
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
The vehicle identification number can be found

in the engine compartment.
The vehicle identification number can also be

found behind the windshield.
Reporting safety defects

For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
10
Information
11
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.

At a glance Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country
specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the
series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
All around the steering wheel
1 Rear window safety switch 48 Front fog lights 107

2 Power windows 47
3 Exterior mirror operation 61 Lights off
4 Opening and closing top tail‐ Daytime running lights 106
gate 40
Parking lights 104
5 Unlocking central locking sys‐
tem 40 Low beams 104
Locking central locking sys‐
tem 40
6 Lights
14
Cockpit At a glance
Automatic headlight con‐ 10 Instrument cluster 85

trol 105 11 Steering wheel buttons, right
Adaptive Light Control 106 Entertainment source
High-beam Assistant 106
Instrument lighting 108
Volume
Night Vision, switch on/switch off

Voice activation 26
heat image 127
7 Steering column stalk, left Telephone, see user's manual for

Turn signal 76 Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication
Thumbwheel for selection lists 97
High beams, head‐
light flasher 76 12 Steering column stalk, right
Wiper 77
High-beam Assistant 106
Rain sensor 78
Roadside parking lights 105
Clean the windshields and head‐

On-board computer 98
lights 77
Rear window wiper in Canadian

8 Steering wheel buttons, left models 79
Store speed 151, 145
Rear window wiper 79
Resume speed 151, 145
Cleaning rear window 79
Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐

ing 145 13 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 70
Cruise control on/off, inter‐
rupt 151 Auto Start/Stop function 71
Cruise control, reduce dis‐

tance 145 14 Horn, total area
Cruise control, increase dis‐ 15 Steering wheel heating 63
tance 145
Cruise control rocker switch 151, 145 16 Adjust steering wheel 63

9 Shift paddles 83
15
At a glance Cockpit
17 Unlock hood 230
All around the center console
1 Control Display 18 9 Automatic Hold 74

2 Glove compartment 183
3 Ventilation 170
10 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
4 Hazard warning system 248 trol 138
Driving Dynamics Control 142

Intelligent Safety button 118
PDC Park Distance Control 154

5 Automatic climate control 167 Rearview camera 156
6 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual Top View 159
for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐
Parking assistant 163
nication
Side View 161
7 Controller with buttons 19
8 Parking brake 73
HDC Hill Descent Control 140
16
Cockpit At a glance
11 Transmission selector lever 80
All around the roofliner
1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ 4 Reading lights 108

quest 248
2 Panoramic glass sunroof 49 5 Interior lights 108
3 Indicator lamp, front-seat pas‐ 6 Glasses compartment 186

senger airbag 111
17
At a glance iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle features and options Control elements at a glance
This chapter describes all standard, country-
Control elements
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
the selected options or country versions. This
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
The concept 1 Control Display

The iDrive combines the functions of many 2 Controller with buttons and, depending on
switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐ the equipment version, with touchpad
ated from a central location.
WARNING Control Display
Operating the integrated information
system and communication devices while driv‐ Information
ing can distract from traffic. It is possible to ▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the
lose control of the vehicle. There is risk of an care instructions.
accident. Only use the systems or devices ▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
stop and use the systems and devices while be damaged.
the vehicle is stationary.◀
▷ In the case of very high temperatures on
the Control Display, e.g. due to intense so‐
lar radiation, the brightness may be re‐
duced down to complete deactivation.
Once the temperature is reduced, e.g.
through shadow or climate control system,
the normal functions are re-established.
Switching on
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the controller.
Switch off
1. Press button.
18
iDrive At a glance
2. "Turn off control display" 3. Move in four directions.
Controller with navigation system Buttons on controller

The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select Press button Function
menu items and enter the settings. MENU Open the main menu.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller. RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
1. Turn. MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation menu.
TEL Opens the phone menu.
BACK Displays the previous display.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Controller without navigation system

The buttons can be used to open the menus
2. Press. directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
1. Turn.
19
At a glance iDrive
2. Press.
The main menu is displayed.

All iDrive functions can be called up via the
3. Move in two directions.
main menu.
Selecting menu items

Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu

item is highlighted.
Buttons on controller
Press button Function
MENU Open the main menu.
Audio Open audio menu last listened 2. Press the controller.

to, switch between audio me‐
nus. Menu items in the Owner's Manual
TEL Opens the phone menu. In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
BACK Open previous panel.
"Settings".
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
Operating concept
▷ Move the controller to the left.
Opening the main menu Closes current display and shows previous
Press button. display.
Reopens previous display by pressing
BACK button. In this case, the current
panel is not closed.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
20
iDrive At a glance
Opens new display on top of previous 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
screen. is displayed.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐ 3. Press the controller.
cate that additional panels can be opened.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Opening the Options menu Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
Press button. box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Touchpad
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller:
Selecting functions
Additional options: move the controller to the 1. "Settings"
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is
2. "Touchpad"
displayed.
3. Select the desired function.
Options menu ▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
The "Options" menu consists of various areas: ▷ "Interactive map": viewing the interac‐
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen". tive map.
▷ Control options for the selected main ▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses.
menu, e.g., for "Radio". ▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
▷ If applicable, further operating options for letters and numbers.
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".
Entering letters and numbers
Changing settings Entering letters requires some practice at the
1. Select a field. beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
following:
21
At a glance iDrive
▷ The system recognizes capital and lower Example: setting the clock
case letters. For the input of upper/lower
case letters and numbers, it may be neces‐ Setting the clock
sary to switch to the corresponding input
On the Control Display:
mode, e.g. when upper and lower case let‐
ters are written the same way. Switching
between cases, numbers and letters, refer 1. Press button. The main menu is dis‐
to page 25. played.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on 2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
the Control Display. lighted, and then press the controller.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such
as accents or periods so that the letter can
be clearly recognized. Possible input de‐
pends on the set language. Where neces‐
sary, enter special characters via the con‐
troller.
▷ To delete a character, slide to the left on
the touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right in
the center of the touchpad. 3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
to display "Time/Date".
▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad. 4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right
in the lower area of the touchpad.
Using interactive map and Internet

Via touch-pad move the interactive map in the
navigation system and Internet sites.
Function Controls
Move interactive map or Swipe into re‐

Internet sites. spective direc‐
tion. 5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller.
Enlarge/shrink interactive Drag in or out on
map or Internet sites. the touchpad with
fingers.
Display the menu or open Tap once.

a link in the Internet.
Changing settings
You may change control display settings via
touchpad. Swipe left or right accordingly.
22
iDrive At a glance
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and Symbol Meaning

press the controller.
Text message was received.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller. Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked.

Status information SIM card is missing.
Status field Enter PIN.

The following information is displayed in the
status field at the top right: Entertainment symbols
▷ Time.
Symbol Meaning
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off. CD/DVD player.
▷ Wireless network reception strength. Music collection.
▷ Phone status.
Gracenote® database.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
AUX-IN port in the front or in the
Status field symbols rear.
The symbols are grouped as follows. USB audio interface.
Radio symbols
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Spoken instructions are turned off.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone symbols Split screen

Symbol Meaning General information
Incoming or outgoing call. Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
Missed call. from the on-board comupter.
Wireless network reception In the divided screen view, the so-called split
strength. screen, this information remains visible even
when you change to another menu.
Symbol flashes: network search.
Wireless network is not available. Switching the split screen on and off
Bluetooth is switched on.
Roaming is active. 1. Press button.
23
At a glance iDrive
2. "Split screen" The function will work immediately. This

means, e.g., that the number is dialed when a
Selecting the display phone number is selected.
Displaying the button assignment
1. Press button. Touch buttons with bare fingers. Do not wear
2. "Split screen" gloves or use objects.
3. Move the controller until the split screen is The key assignment is displayed at top edge of
selected. screen.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Deleting the button assignments

1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
approx. five seconds.
2. "OK"
Programmable memory
buttons
Deleting personal in the
General information vehicle
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ The concept
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐ Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves
tions, phone numbers and menu entries. personal data, such as stored radio stations.
These personal data can be permanently de‐
Settings are stored for the profile currently
leted through iDrive.
used.
Saving a function General information

Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.
lowing data can be deleted:
2. Press and hold the desired button, ▷ Personal Profile settings.
until a signal sounds. ▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored Favorites buttons.
Running a function
▷ Travel and on-board comupter information.
Press button.
▷ Music collection.
24
iDrive At a glance
▷ Navigation, e.g. stored destinations. Switching between cases, letters and

▷ Phone book. numbers
▷ Online data, e.g. Favorites, cookies. Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
▷ Voice notes
and numbers:
▷ Login accounts.
Symbol Function
▷ RemoteApp smartphone tethering.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up Enter the letters.
to 30 minutes. Enter the numbers.
Functional requirement or Tip controller up.

Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Without navigation system
Deleting data Select symbol.
Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐
trol Display. Entry comparison
1. Switch on the ignition. Entering names and addresses: choice is nar‐
rowed down with every letter entered and let‐
2. "Settings"
ters may be added automatically.
3. Open "Options".
Entries are continuously compared with data
4. "Delete personal data" stored in the vehicle.
5. "Continue" ▷ Only those letters are offered during input
6. "OK" for which data is available.
▷ Target search: names of locations may be
entered in languages available through
Entering letters and numbers Control Display.
General information
1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐

bers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the let‐

ter or number.
Press the controller for an extended

period: delete all letters or numbers.
25
At a glance Voice activation system
Voice activation system

Vehicle features and options Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press button on the steering
wheel.
also applies to safety-related functions and 2. Wait for the signal.
systems. The respectively applicable country 3. Say the command.
provisions must be observed when using the A command that is recognized by the voice
respective features and systems. activation system is announced and dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
The concept cates that the voice activation system is active.
▷ Most functions displayed on the Control If no other commands are available, use func‐
Display can be operated by voice com‐ tion via iDrive.
mands via the voice activation system. The
system supports you with announcements Terminating the voice activation
during input. system
▷ Functions that can only be used when the Briefly press the button on the steer‐
vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the ing wheel or ›Cancel‹.
voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Possible commands
Manual to use with the voice activation Most menu items on the Control Display can
system. be voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on the menu
that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
Requirements play.
Via the Control Display, set a language that is There are short commands for many functions.
also supported by the voice activation system You may select lists such as phone lists via
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐ voice activation. Read these lists out loud ex‐
fied. actly as they show in the respective list.
Set the language, refer to page 101.
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have available commands read out
loud for you: ›Voice commands‹.
E. g. if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the
commands for the settings are read out loud.
26
Voice activation system At a glance
Executing functions using short

commands 2. Press button on the steering
wheel.
Execute functions on the main menu via short
commands. It almost doesn't matter which 3. ›Tone‹
menu item is selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.
List of short commands for the voice activation
system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ Setting the voice dialog
munication Owner's Manual. Set system to standard dialog or use a short
version.
Help dialog for the voice activation The short version of the voice dialog plays
system back short messages in abbreviated form.
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹.
1. "Settings"
Additional commands for the help dialog:
2. "Language/Units"
▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐
tion about the current operating options 3. "Speech type:"
and the most important commands for 4. Select setting.
them.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information
about the principle of operation for the
voice activation system is announced.
One example: open the tone

settings
Via the main menu
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the controller. Adjusting the volume
1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
needed. structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
2. Press button on the steering volume of other audio sources is changed.
wheel. ▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐
3. ›Radio‹ rently used.
4. ›Tone‹
Via short command Information on Emergency

The desired tone settings can also be started Requests
via a short command. Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
needed. tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
27
At a glance Voice activation system
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐

ment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 248, close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
28
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Vehicle features and options Select components
This chapter describes all standard, country- 1. Press button.

2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle info".
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to 3. Press the controller.
the selected options or country versions. This 4. Selecting desired range:
also applies to safety-related functions and ▷ "Quick reference"
provisions must be observed when using the ▷ "Search by pictures"
respective features and systems. ▷ "Owner's Manual"
Integrated Owner's Manual

in the vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. It specifically
describes features and functions found in the
vehicle.
Components of the Integrated

Leafing through the Owner's Manual
Owner's Manual
The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of Page by page with link access
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
Turn the controller until the next or previous
mation or possible access.
page is displayed.
Quick Reference Guide
Page by page without link access
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
Scroll through the pages directly while skip‐
tion how to operate the car, how to use basic
ping the links.
vehicle functions or what to do in case of a
breakdown. This information can also be dis‐ Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
played while driving. the controller to browse from page to page.
Scroll back.
Search by images
Image search provides information and de‐
scriptions. This is helpful when the terminol‐ Scroll forward.
ogy for a feature is not at hand.
Owner's Manual
Search for information and descriptions by en‐
tering terms selected from the index.
29
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Context help - Owner's Manual to the Programmable memory buttons

temporarily selected function
You may open the relevant information di‐ General information
rectly. The Owner's Manual can be stored on the Pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
Opening via the iDrive rectly.
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the Options menu: Storing
1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.
1. Press button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options" 2. Press selected button for more
menu is displayed. than 2 seconds.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Executing
Opening when a Check Control Press button.
message is displayed The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
Directly from the Check Control message on mediately.
the Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the

Owner's Manual
To switch from a function, e. g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
alternate between the two displays:
1. Press button or move the controller

to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4. Press button again to return to last

displayed function.
5. Press button to return to the page of

the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate permanently between the last dis‐
played function and the Owner's Manual re‐
peat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every
time.
30
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
31
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that
are useful for driving and your safety, comfort
and convenience are described here.

Controls Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options Overview

1 Unlocking
2 Locking
Remote control/key 3 Opening the tailgate
General information 4 Panic mode

The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with integrated key. Integrated key
Every remote control holds a replaceable bat‐
tery.
You may set the key functions depending on
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
sion. For Settings, refer to page 44.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every
remote control. Personal Profile, refer to
page 35.
The remote controls hold information on re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐ Press button, arrow 1, and remove the key, ar‐
mote control, refer to page 238 row 2.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
▷ Driver's door.
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side.
34
Opening and closing Controls
Replacing the battery ▷ Interference from radio transmissions

through mobile devices in close proximity
to remote control.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by
charger while charging items such as mo‐
bile devices in the vehicle.
A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐
tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start
the engine.
1. Remove integrated key from remote con‐ Starting the engine with emergency
trol. detection of the remote control
2. Raise the cover of the battery compart‐
ment, arrow 1.
3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐
ment, arrow 2.
4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
positive side facing up.
5. Press the cover closed.
Have old battery disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another If a respective Check Control message ap‐
qualified service center or repair shop pears, hold the remote control with its back
or take it to a collection point. against the marked area on the steering col‐
umn. The tailgate button on the remote control
should be at the same height as the marked
New remote controls
area. Press the Start/Stop button within
New remote controls are available from a 10 seconds while pressing the brake pedal.
dealer’s service center or another qualified
If the remote control is not recognized: slightly
service center or repair shop.
change the height position of the remote con‐
trol and repeat the procedure.
Loss of the remote controls
The lost remote control can be blocked by a
service center or repair shop. Personal Profile
Emergency detection of remote The concept
control Personal Profile provides three profiles, using
It is possible to switch on the ignition or start which personal vehicle settings can be stored.
the engine in situations such as the following: Every remote control has one of these profiles
assigned.
▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐
mote control by external sources e.g., by If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐
radio masts. trol, the assigned personal profile will be acti‐
vated. All settings stored in the profile are au‐
▷ Empty battery in remote control.
tomatically applied.
35
If several drivers use their own remote control, Profile management

the vehicle will adjust the personal settings
during unlocking. These settings are also re‐ Opening profiles
stored, if the vehicle has been used in the Regardless of the remote control in use a dif‐
meantime by a person with a different remote ferent profile may be activated.
control.
About iDrive:
Changes to the settings are automatically
saved in the personal profile. 1. "Settings"
Three personal profiles and a guest profile can 2. "Profiles"
be created. 3. Select a profile.
▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile
Adjusting are automatically applied.
The settings for the following systems and ▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐
functions are saved in the active profile. The mote control being used at the time.
scope of storable settings is country- and
equipment-dependable. ▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐
ent remote control, this profile will apply to
▷ Unlocking and locking. both remote controls. It cannot be differen‐
▷ Lights. tiated anymore between the settings for
▷ Climate control. the two remote controls.
▷ Radio.
Renaming profiles
▷ Instrument cluster.
A personal name can be assigned to every pro‐
▷ Programmable memory buttons. file to avoid confusion between the profiles.
▷ Volumes, tone. On the Control Display:
▷ Control Display.
1. "Settings"
▷ Navigation.
2. "Profiles"
▷ Park Distance Control PDC.
3. Open "Options".
▷ Rearview camera
4. "Rename current profile"
▷ Side View.
▷ Head-up Display. Resetting profiles
▷ Driving Dynamics Control. The settings of the active profile are reset to
▷ Driver's seat position, exterior mirror posi‐ their default values.
tion, steering wheel position. On the Control Display:
▷ Cruise control. 1. "Settings"
▷ Intelligent Safety. 2. "Profiles"
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection. 3. Open "Options".
▷ Night vision. 4. "Reset current profile"
Exporting profiles
Most settings of the active profile can be ex‐
ported.
36
This can be helpful for securing and retrieving Using the guest profile
personal settings, before delivering the vehicle The guest profile is for individual settings that
to a workshop, e.g. Profiles can be taken to an‐ are saved in none of the three personal pro‐
other vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro‐ files.
file function.
This can be useful for drivers who are using
The following export options are available: the vehicle temporarily and do not have their
▷ Via BMW Online. own profile.
▷ Via the USB port to a USB device. On the Control Display:
Popular file systems for USB devices are 1. "Settings"
supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the rec‐
2. "Profiles"
ommended formats for profile export.
Other formats may not support the export. 3. "Guest"
Export is made via the USB port to a USB de‐ The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
vice. Popular file systems for USB devices are assigned to the current remote control.
supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the recom‐
mended formats for profile export. Other for‐ Display profile list during start
mats may not support the export. The profile list can be displayed during each
On the Control Display: start to select the desired profile.
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles" 1. "Settings"
3. "Export profile" 2. "Profiles"
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" 3. Open "Options".
USB interface: "USB device" 4. "Display user list at startup"
Importing profiles
Profiles exported via BMW Online can also be Using the remote control
imported via BMW Online.
Information
Profiles stored on a USB device can be im‐
ported via the USB interface. WARNING
Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐ People or animals in the vehicle can lock
ported profile. the doors from the inside and lock themselves
in. The vehicle can then not be opened from
the outside. There is risk of injuries. Take the
1. "Settings" remote control along so that the vehicle can be
2. "Profiles" opened from the outside.◀
3. "Import profile"
Unlocking
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
USB interface: "USB device" Press button on the remote control.
Depending on the settings, refer to page 44,

the following access points are unlocked.
37
▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap. Switching on interior lights and
▷ All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap. courtesy lights
In addition, the following functions are exe‐ Press button on the remote control with
cuted: the vehicle locked.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, when it The courtesy lamps are only switched on when
is dark outside, the courtesy lamps are also it is dark outside. This function is not available,
switched on. This function is not available, if the interior lamps were switched off man‐
if the interior lamps were switched off man‐ ually.
ually.
If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐
▷ The welcome lamps are switched on, if this onds after vehicle was locked, the interior mo‐
function was activated. tion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 45, is theft warning system, refer to page 47, are
disarmed. turned off. After locking, wait 10 seconds be‐
fore pressing the button again.
Convenient opening
Press and hold this button on the re‐ Panic mode
mote control after unlocking. You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the remote Press button on the remote control for
control is pressed. at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Locking
WARNING Opening the tailgate
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐ CAUTION
ble with special knowledge. The tailgate swings back and up when it
If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐ opens. There is risk of property damage. Make
cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the is clear during opening and closing.◀
vehicle from the outside when there are people
in it.◀ To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
place the remote control in the cargo area.
The driver's door must be closed.
Press button on the remote control for
Press button on the remote control. approx. 1 second and release.
The closed tailgate is automatically opened,

All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are
whether or not the vehicle is locked or un‐
being locked.
locked.
The alarm system, refer to page 45, is armed.
Depending on the features and the country
version, it is also possible to have door un‐
locked. Create the settings, refer to page 44.
The tailgate cannot be opened with the remote
control while a trailer is being towed.
38
If the doors were not unlocked, the tailgate is ▷ LX8CAS.

locked again as soon as it closes. Take the re‐ ▷ LX8CAS2.
mote control with you and do not leave it in the
▷ MYTCAS4.
cargo area; otherwise, the remote control is
locked inside the vehicle when the tailgate is Compliance statement:
closed. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
CAUTION Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while ▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
driving. There is risk of property damage. ference, and
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐ ▷ this device must accept any interference
jects do not hit the rear window.◀ received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Malfunction Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
Remote control detection by the vehicle can these devices could void the user's authority to
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐ operate this equipment.
lowing circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
Without remote control
page 35.
From the outside
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment WARNING
with high transmit power. Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to ble with special knowledge.
metal objects. If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐
▷ Interference of the radio connection from cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is
mobile phones or other electronic devices risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the
in direct proximity. vehicle from the outside when there are people
in it.◀
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects or electronic devices. CAUTION
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also The door lock is permanently joined with
be unlocked and locked from the outside with‐ the door. The door handle can be moved.
out remote control, refer to page 39. When pulling the door handle with the
integrated key inserted, paint or key can be
For US owners only damaged. There is risk of property damage.
The transmitter and receiver units comply with Remove the integrated key before pulling the
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication outside door handle.◀
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door
erned by the following:
lock using the integrated key, refer to page 34.
FCC ID: The other doors must be unlocked or locked
▷ LX8766S. from the inside.
▷ LX8766E. 1. Remove lid on the door lock.
39
To do this, slide the integrated key into the The vehicle is not secured against theft when
opening from below and remove the lid. locking.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.
Unlocking and opening

▷ Press the central locking system
button to unlock the doors to‐
gether, and then pull the door handle
2. Unlock or lock door lock. above the armrest.
▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the
Alarm system door to open the door. The other doors re‐
The alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is main locked.
locked with the integrated key. ▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle
The alarm system is triggered when the door is on the door to be opened; the first time un‐
opened, if the vehicle was unlocked via the locks the door, the second time opens it.
door lock. The other doors remain locked.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
tion, if needed, through emergency detection Doors
of the remote control, refer to page 35.
Automatic Soft Closing
From the inside To close the doors, push lightly.
It is closed automatically.
Unlocking and locking
WARNING
Thanks to Soft Close the closing goes
into the lock automatically. Body parts can be
jammed. There is risk of injuries. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during opening and closing.◀
Tailgate
Via the buttons for the central locking system.
Information
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
▷ By pressing the button, the vehicle
is locked with the doors closed.
▷ Pressing the button unlocks the

vehicle.
40
Automatic tailgate operation ▷ Press button in the driver's door.

The tailgate cannot be opened
Adjusting the opening height with the remote control while the driver's
You can set how far the tailgate should open. door is opened.
CAUTION If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens
automatically to the adjusted opening height.
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is risk of property damage. Make The opening procedure is interrupted:
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate ▷ By pressing a button again.
is clear during opening and closing.◀ ▷ When starting the engine.
When adjusting the opening height, ensure ▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
that there is a clearance of at least 4 in/10 cm ▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
above the tailgate. tailgate.
1. "Settings"
2. "Tailgate"
Closing
3. Turn the controller until the desired open‐ WARNING
ing height is selected. Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is risk of injuries. Make
Opening sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
CAUTION
The tailgate swings back and up when it CAUTION
opens. There is risk of property damage. Make Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate the rear window and heat conductors while
is clear during opening and closing.◀ driving. There is risk of property damage.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
The lower tailgate must be closed; otherwise, a

Check Control message will appear.
The floor panel in the trunk must be closed,
otherwise the tailgate cannot be closed.
Without Comfort Access:
▷ Press button on tailgate's exterior.
▷ Press button on the remote con‐

trol for approx. 1 second.
As the case may be, the doors are also un‐
locked. Opening with the remote control,
refer to page 38.
The tailgate cannot be opened with the re‐
mote control while a trailer is being towed. ▷ Press button on the inside of the tailgate.
41
With Comfort Access: An acoustic signal sounds and the tailgate

closes.
The closing operation is interrupted:
▷ When starting the engine.
▷ The vehicle starts off with jerks.
Manual operation
WARNING
With manual operation of a blocked tail‐
▷ Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of the gate, it can loosen itself unexpectedly from the
tailgate. blockage. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Do not operate the tailgate
Pressing the button again stops the mo‐
manually if it is blocked. Have checked by a
tion.
▷ Press button, arrow 2. service center or repair shop.◀
The vehicle will be locked after closing the
In the event of an electrical malfunction, oper‐
tailgate. The driver's door must be closed
ate the unlocked tailgate manually with a slow
for this purpose and the remote control
and smooth motion.
must be outside of the vehicle in the area
of the tailgate. Manually unlocking the tailgate, refer to
page 42.
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
Manual unlocking
When there is an electrical malfunction.
tion.
1. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
2. In the lower tailgate, loosen and remove
the cover using the onboard vehicle tool kit
or a suitable object.
▷ Press button on tailgate's exterior.

tion.
▷ Pull and hold the button in the 3. Pull the loop in the direction of the interior.
driver door. Releasing the button The tailgate is unlocked.
stops window/roof movement. 4. The top tailgate opens, press the loop back
The remote control must be located in the in.
interior for this function. 5. Insert and close the cover.
42
The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is Information

closed. To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
Lower tailgate
Functional requirements
Opening
▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐
ence nearby.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle near
the doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐
mote control is in the vehicle.
Pull the lever and swing down the tailgate.
Unlocking
The open tailgate can be loaded with up to
550 lbs/250 kg.
Closing
Swing up the tailgate, and press it closed.
Comfort Access
The concept
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely,
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
arrow.
ing the remote control.
This corresponds with pressing the button on
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
the remote control. .
trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the
Locking
car's interior.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Opening the tailgate individually
▷ Start the engine.
Touch the surface on the handle of a vehicle

door, arrow, with your finger for approx. 1 sec‐
ond without grasping the door handle.
43
This corresponds with pressing the button on CAUTION

the remote control. . The tailgate swings back and up when it
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition opens. There is risk of property damage. Make
and all electronic systems and/or power con‐ sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
sumers are turned off before locking the vehi‐ is clear during opening and closing.◀
cle.
Malfunction
Convenient closing Remote control detection by the vehicle can
WARNING among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is risk of injuries. Make sure ▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
that the area of movement of the doors is clear charged. Replace the battery, refer to
during convenient closing.◀ page 35.
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmit power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity.
Do not transport the remote control together
Touch the surface on the handle of a vehicle with metal objects or electronic devices.
door, arrow, with your finger and hold it there In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
without grasping the door handle. the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
This corresponds to pressing and holding control or using the integrated key, refer to
the remote control button. page 39.
In addition to locking, the windows and the

glass sunroof close and the exterior mirrors Adjusting
fold in.
Unlocking
Unlocking the tailgate separately The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐
Press button on tailgate's exterior. fer to page 35.
This corresponds with pressing the button on
the remote control. . Doors
The situation of the doors does not change. 1. "Settings"
Take the remote control with you and do not 2. "Doors/key"
leave it in the trunk; otherwise, the remote con‐ 3. Select the symbol.
trol is locked inside the vehicle when the tail‐ 4. Select the desired function:
gate is closed.
▷ "Driver's door only"
44
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler The vehicle locks automatically after a
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐ short period of time if no door is
locks the entire vehicle. opened.
▷ "All doors" ▷ "Lock after start driving"
The entire vehicle is unlocked. The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive off.
Tailgate
Depending on optional features and country Retrieving the seat, mirror, and
version, this setting is not offered in some steering wheel settings
cases. The driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering
wheel position adjusted last will be stored for
1. "Settings"
the active profile.
2. "Doors/key"
When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions
3. Select the symbol. are automatically retrieved if this function was
4. Select the desired function: activated.
▷ "Tailgate" WARNING
The tailgate is opened. There is risk of jamming when moving
▷ "Tailgate + door(s)" the seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
The tailgate is opened and the doors
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
unlocked.
justment.◀
Confirmation signals from the vehicle The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐ ▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.
fer to page 35. ▷ When a button of the seat, mirror, and
1. "Settings" steering wheel memory is pressed briefly.
2. "Doors/key"
Activating the setting
3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐
1. "Settings"
mation signals.
2. "Doors/key"
▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
3. "Last seat position autom."
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
Automatic locking
The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐
Alarm system
fer to page 35.
The concept
1. "Settings" When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
2. "Doors/key" system responds to:
3. Select the desired function: ▷ Opening a door, the hood or the tailgate.
▷ "Lock if no door is opened" ▷ Movements in the interior.
45
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐ Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing mirror
the car.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly signals tampering:
▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
tem.
▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
Arming and disarming the alarm

▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
system
2 seconds:
When you unlock or lock the vehicle, either
The alarm system is armed.
with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac‐
cess, the alarm system is disarmed or armed at ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
the same time. Doors, hood or tailgate are not correctly
closed. Correctly closed access points are
Door lock and armed alarm system secured.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp
opened, when the vehicle is unlocked via the flashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐
door lock. sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active.
When the still open access is closed, inte‐
Tailgate and armed alarm system rior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will
The tailgate can be opened even when the be switched on.
alarm system is armed. ▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and ing:
monitored again when the doors are locked. The vehicle has not been tampered with.
The hazard warning system flashes once.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the engine ignition is switched on, but
Panic mode
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
An alarm has been triggered.
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
To switch off the alarm: press any button. The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is
towed.
Interior motion sensor

The windows and glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
46
Avoiding unintentional alarms ▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ ▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
sor can be switched off together, such as in ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
the following situations:
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
▷ In automatic car washes. leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
▷ In duplex garages. hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐ and lock the vehicle.◀
cles, at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle. Overview
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and

interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor are turned off until the vehicle is locked Opening
again.
▷ Press the button to the resistance
Switching off the alarm point.
▷ Unlock vehicle with the remote control or The window opens while the switch is held.
switch on the ignition, if needed through
emergency detection of remote control, re‐ ▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
fer to page 35. ance point.
▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying The window opens automatically. Pressing
the remote control on your person, grasp the switch again stops the motion.
the driver side or front passenger side door See also: Convenient opening, refer to
handle completely. page 38, via remote control.
Closing
Power windows WARNING
Information When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
WARNING juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
Unattended children or animals can that the area of movement of the windows is
move the vehicle and endanger themselves clear during opening and closing.◀
and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. ▷ Pull the switch to the resistance
▷ Releasing the parking brake. point.
47
The window closes while the switch is The pinch protection is limited and the
held. window reopens slightly if the closing force
exceeds a certain margin.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance 2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
point. again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
The window closes automatically. Pulling there.
again stops the motion. The window closes without jam protection.
See also: closing by means of Comfort Access,
refer to page 43. Safety switch
Pinch protection system General information

WARNING The safety switch in the driver's door can be
used to prevent children, e.g., from opening
When operating the windows, body parts
and closing the rear windows using the
switches in the rear.
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
Information
clear during opening and closing.◀
WARNING
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
Accessories on the windows such as an‐ and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
tennas can impact jam protection. There is risk juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
of injuries. Do not install accessories in the that the area of movement of the windows is
area of movement of the windows.◀ clear during opening and closing.◀
If closing force exceeds a specific margin as a In order to prevent uncontrolled closing of the
window closes, closing is interrupted. windows, press the safety switch, e.g. if chil‐
The window reopens slightly. dren or animals are carried in the rear.
Closing without the pinch protection Switching on and off

system Press button.
WARNING The LED lights up if the safety func‐
When operating the windows, body parts tion is switched on.
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
Roller sunblinds
In case of danger from the outside or if ice Roller sunblinds for the rear side
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐ windows
lows: Pull out the roller sunblind at the loop and hook
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point it onto the bracket.
and hold it there.
48
WARNING ▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.

With closed roller sunblinds and open ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
windows, the roller sunblinds can be loaded There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
heavily while driving due to the wind. The roller leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
sunblinds can be damaged and compromise hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
the passengers. There is risk of injuries. Do not and lock the vehicle.◀
open the windows while driving if the roller
sunblinds are closed.◀
Tilting up and closing tilted glass
sunroof
Push switch briefly upward.
Panoramic glass sunroof
▷ The closed glass sunroof is
General information tilted and the sliding visor
opens slightly.
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be
operated together or separately, using the ▷ The opened glass sunroof
same switch. closes until it is in its tilted
position. The sliding visor
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
does not move.
tion is switched on.
▷ The tilted glass sunroof is being closed.
The sliding visor does not move.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and

sliding visor separately
▷ Press the switch in the de‐
sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
The sliding visor opens, as
long as the switch is held
Information
down. If the sliding visor is
WARNING already fully open, the glass
Body parts can be jammed on operating sunroof opens.
the glass sunroof. There is risk of injuries. The glass sunroof closes as
Make sure that the area of movement of the long as the switch is held
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐ down. If the glass sunroof is
ing.◀ already closed or in the tilted
position, the sliding visor
WARNING closes.
Unattended children or animals can ▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
move the vehicle and endanger themselves past the resistance point.
The sliding visor opens automatically. If the
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. sliding visor is already fully open, the glass
▷ Releasing the parking brake. sunroof opens automatically.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
49
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If Closing from the open position
the glass sunroof is already closed or in the without pinch protection
tilted position, the sliding visor closes au‐ If there is an external danger, proceed as fol‐
tomatically. lows:
Pressing the switch upward stops the mo‐
1. Press the switch forward beyond the re‐
tion.
sistance point and hold.
The pinch protection is limited and the
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing
sliding visor together force exceeds a certain margin.
Briefly press the switch twice in 2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
succession in the desired direc‐ resistance point and hold until the glass
tion past the resistance point. sunroof closes without jam protection.
The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐ Make sure that the closing area is clear.
sor move together. Pressing the
switch upward stops the motion. Closing from the raised position
without pinch protection
▷ See also: Convenient opening, refer to
If there is an external danger, push the switch
page 38, via remote control.
forward past the resistance point and hold it.
▷ See also: closing by means of Comfort Ac‐
The glass sunroof closes without jam protec‐
cess, refer to page 43.
tion.
Comfort position
Initializing after a power failure
If the glass sunroof is not automatically com‐
After a power failure during the opening or
pletely opened, the comfort position has been
closing process, the glass sunroof can only be
attained. In this position the wind noises in the
operated to a limited extent.
interior are the least.
If desired, continue the movement by Pressing Initializing the system
the switch.
The system can be initialized when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running.
Pinch protection system
During the initialization, the glass sunroof
If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
closes without jam protection.
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately WARNING
the middle of the opening in the roof, or from Body parts can be jammed on operating
the tilted position during closing. the glass sunroof. There is risk of injuries.
The glass sunroof reopens slightly. Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
WARNING
ing.◀
Body parts can be jammed on operating
the glass sunroof. There is risk of injuries. Press the switch up and hold it
Make sure that the area of movement of the until the initialization is com‐
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐ plete:
ing.◀ ▷ Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is com‐
50
pleted when the glass sun‐

roof and sliding visor are
completely closed.
▷ The glass sunroof closes without jam pro‐
tection.
51
Controls Adjusting
Adjusting
Vehicle features and options backrest in an as upright position as possible
and do not adjust again while driving.◀
specific and optional features offered with the WARNING
series. It also describes features that are not There is risk of jamming when moving
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of
the selected options or country versions. This property damage. Make sure that the area of
also applies to safety-related functions and movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
systems. The respectively applicable country justment.◀
Electrically adjustable seats
Overview
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital
contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 57.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 58.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 109.
1 Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory
Front seats 2 Shoulder support

3 Backrest width
Information 4 Lumbar support
WARNING 5 Backrest, head restraint
Seat adjustments while driving can lead 6 Forward/back, height, tilt
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle 7 Thigh support
control could be lost. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Only adjust the side on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀ General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
WARNING for the profile currently used. When the vehicle
With a backrest inclined too far to the is unlocked via the remote control, the position
rear, the protective effect of the safety belt is automatically retrieved if the Function, refer
cannot be ensured anymore. There is a danger to page 45, is activated for this purpose.
of sliding under the safety belt in an accident.
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Adjust
the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the
52
Adjusting Controls
Adjustments in detail Thigh support

1. Forward/backward
Multifunctional seat
2. Height
Adjust the position using the lever.
Sport seat
3. Seat tilt
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust

the thigh support.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
4. Backrest tilt
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the switch:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
53
Controls Adjusting
Backrest width Switch off

Change the width of the back‐ Press button longer.
rest using the side wings to ad‐ The LEDs go out.
just the lateral support.
Temperature distribution
The heating action in the seat cushion and
Shoulder support backrest can be distributed in different ways.
1. "Climate"
2. "Front seat heating"
3. Select the required seat.
4. Turn the controller to set the temperature
distribution.
Active seat ventilation, front

Also supports the back in the shoulder area:
▷ Results in a relaxed seating position.
The concept
The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are
▷ Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.
cooled by means of integrated fans.
The ventilation cools the seat, e. g., if the vehi‐
Front seat heating cle interior is overheated or for continuous
cooling at high temperatures.
Overview
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
Active seat ventilation button
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the journey is continued within approx. 15 Switching on
minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐ Press button once for each ventilation
ically with the temperature selected last. level.
When ECO PRO, refer to page 200, is acti‐ The highest level is active when three LEDs
vated, the heater output is reduced. are lit.
54
Adjusting Controls
After a short time, the system automatically Forward/backward

moves down one level in order to prevent ex‐
cessive cooling.
Switch off
Press button longer.
The LEDs go out.
Rear seats
1. Pull the lever, arrow 1, and slide the seat in
Second row of seats the desired direction.
2. Release lever and move seat slightly for‐
Information ward or back to get it to latch in place.
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when folding Backrest tilt
down the center armrest in the rear. There is The backrest tilt can be adjusted to six set‐
risk of injuries. Make sure that the area of tings.
movement of the center armrest is clear during
folding down.◀
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Only adjust the side on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING Pull the lever, and apply your weight to the

When folding back the second row of backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
seats, there is a danger of jamming. There is
risk of injuries or risk of property damage. Access to the third row of seats
Make sure that the area of movement of the 1. Make sure that the middle section is folded
second row of seats is clear prior to folding up.
down.◀
WARNING
Seats in the second row of seats are not
locked when they are folded down and they
can move. There is risk of injuries and risk of
property damage. Only fold the seats in the
second row down while loading. When driving
without a load, fold back and lock the seats in
the second row before driving away.◀
55
Controls Adjusting
When the middle section is folded down, Third row of seats

comfortable entry is not possible.
General information
The third row of seats is divided and offers
space for two people.
Folding up the backrest

WARNING
With an unlocked backrest, an unsecured
load can be thrown into the car's interior, e.g.
in case of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
2. Pull the lever and fold the seat forward. neuver. There is risk of injuries. Make sure that
If the second row of seats is not locked, a the backrest engages into the locking after
warning symbol is displayed in the instrument folding it back.◀
cluster.
Before folding up the backrest, remove the
cargo cover, refer to page 181. If necessary,
Rear seat heating slide the second row of seats forward a little.
1. Pull the lever, arrow, to unlock the back‐

rest.
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level. 2. Fold up and latch the backrest.
The maximum temperature is reached when 3. Slide headrests into the highest position.
three LEDs are lit.
Folding the backrest down
If the journey is continued within approx. 15
minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐ 1. Moving the headrest down.
ically with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO, refer to page 200, is acti‐
vated, the heater output is reduced.
Switch off
Press button longer.
The LEDs go out.
56
Adjusting Controls
2. Pull the lever, arrows, to unlock the back‐ Information

rest.
WARNING
If the safety belt is used by more than
one person, the protective effect of the safety
belt cannot be ensured anymore. There is risk
of injuries or danger to life. Do not allow more
than one person to wear a single safety belt.
Infants and children are not allowed in an occu‐
pant's lap, but must be transported and re‐
spectively secured in designated child restraint
systems.◀
3. Fold the backrest down.
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
Safety belts can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
Seats with safety belt safety belt can cause additional injuries, e.g. in
the event of an accident or during braking and
Your vehicle has been fitted with five or seven
evasive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries or
safety belts for your and your passengers'
danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are
safety. However, they can only offer protection
wearing safety belts correctly.◀
when adjusted correctly.
WARNING
General information
With a rear backrest that is not locked,
Always make sure that safety belts are being the protective function of the middle safety
worn by all occupants before driving off. belt is not guaranteed. There is risk of injuries
For the occupants' safety the belt locking or danger to life. If you are using the middle
mechanism triggers early. Slowly guide the safety belt, lock the wider rear backrest.◀
belt out of the holder when applying it.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing Correct use of safety belts
added protection, they are not a substitute for ▷ Wear the belt twist-free and as tight to
safety belts. your body as possible over your lap and
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point shoulders.
will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐ ▷ Wear the belt deep on your hips over your
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted. lap. The belt may not press on your stom‐
▷ The two outer safety belt buckles, ach.
integrated into the 2nd row of seats, are for ▷ Do not wear the belt on your throat, rub it
passengers sitting on the left and right. on sharp edges, guide it or jam it in across
▷ The center belt buckle of the 2nd row of hard or fragile objects.
seats is solely intended for the center pas‐ ▷ Avoid thick clothing.
senger.
▷ Re-tighten the belt frequently upward
around your upper body.
57
Controls Adjusting
Buckling the belt If the situation passes without an accident oc‐

curring, the belt tension relaxes.
If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐
cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt
using the red button in the buckle. Fasten the
belt before continuing on your trip.
Damage to safety belts

WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in may not be fully functional or fail in the follow‐
the belt buckle. ing situations:
To ease accessibility to the seat belt buckle, an ▷ Safety belts are damaged, soiled or
adjustable slider is available on the belt to help changed in any other way.
position the buckle when not in use.
▷ Safety belt buckle is damaged or heavily
soiled.
Tensioning the safety belt ▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
automatically modified.
When the belt is closed, it is automatically Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
tightened once after the release. the event of an accident. There is risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety
Unbuckling the belt belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt
1. Hold the belt firmly. retractors or belt anchors and keep them
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. clean. Have the safety belts checked after an
accident at the dealer’s service center or an‐
3. Guide the belt back into its roll-up mecha‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
nism.
Wear and tear after accidents or when dam‐
Safety belt reminder for driver's and aged otherwise:
passenger's seat Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐ tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
nal sounds. Make sure that the safety checked.
belts are positioned correctly. The
safety belt reminder is active at speeds above
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated Front head restraints
if objects are placed on the front passenger
seat. Information
WARNING
Safety mode A missing protective effect due to re‐
In critical situations, e.g., during full brake ap‐ moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
plication, the front safety belts tighten auto‐ straints can cause injuries in the head and
matically. neck area. There is risk of injuries. Install head
restraints on occupied seats prior to driving
and make sure that the center of the head re‐
58
Adjusting Controls
straint supports the back of the head at eye Adjusting the height: electrical head
level.◀ restraints
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is risk of injuries.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a Adjusting electrically.
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g. pillows, Distance to the back of the head:
while driving.◀ electrical head restraints
The head restraint is automatically reposi‐
Correctly adjusted head restraint tioned when the shoulder support is adjusted.
General information
Adjusting the side extensions
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
Fold forward for increased lateral support in
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
the resting position.
Active head restraint

In the event of a rear-end collision with a cer‐ Removing
tain severity, the active head restraint automat‐ The head restraints cannot be removed.
ically reduces the distance from the head.
Wear and tear after accidents or when dam‐
aged otherwise: Rear head restraints
Have the active headrest checked and if
Information
needed replaced.
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
59
Controls Adjusting
neck area. There is risk of injuries. Install head The center head restraint cannot be adjusted
restraints on occupied seats prior to driving in elevation.
and make sure that the center of the head re‐
straint supports the back of the head at eye
Removing
level.◀
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
WARNING sitting in the seat in question.
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is risk of injuries.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g. pillows,
sistance.
while driving.◀
2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐
Correctly adjusted head restraint straint out completely.
The center head restraint cannot be removed.
General information
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event Seat, mirror, and steering
of an accident. wheel memory
Height The concept
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is Two driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
approximately at ear level. can be stored per profile, refer to page 35, and
called up. Settings for the backrest width and
Adjusting the height lumbar support are not stored in memory.
Information
WARNING
Using the memory function while driving
can lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is risk of an accident. Only retrieve the
memory function when the vehicle is station‐
ary.◀
▷ To raise: push.
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
headrest down.
60
Adjusting Controls
WARNING Safety mode

There is risk of jamming when moving 1. Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐
the seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of nition.
property damage. Make sure that the area of 2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐ until the adjustment procedure is com‐
justment.◀ pleted.
Overview Calling up of a seat position

deactivated
After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐
tions is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▷ Open or close the door or tailgate.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Storing Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
2. Set the desired position.
General information
3. Press button briefly. The LED in
the button lights up. The mirror on the passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED
is lit. The LED goes out. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐
ror setting is stored for the profile currently
If the SET button is pressed accidentally: used. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐
Press button again. mote control, the position is automatically re‐
The LED goes out. trieved if this function is active.
Information
Calling up settings
WARNING
Comfort function Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
1. Open the driver's door. than they appear. The distance to the traffic
behind could be incorrectly estimated, e.g.
2. If necessary, switch off the ignition. while changing lanes. There is risk of an acci‐
3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2. dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic be‐
The corresponding seat position is performed hind by looking over your shoulder.◀
automatically.
The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐
ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
61
Controls Adjusting
Overview Activating
1. Slide the switch to the driver's side

mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror
position.
1 Adjusting 62 Fold in and out

2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor CAUTION
3 Fold in and out 62 Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐
hicle can be damaged in car washes. There is
risk of property damage. Before washing, fold
Selecting a mirror
in the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀
To change over to the other mirror:
Press button.
Slide the switch.
Possible at speeds up to approx.

Adjusting electrically 15 mph/20 km/h.
The setting corresponds to the direc‐ Beneficial in the following situations:
tion in which the button is pressed. ▷ In car washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
Saving positions ▷ For folding mirrors back out that were
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer folded away manually.
to page 60. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
Adjusting manually 25 mph/40 km/h.
In case of electrical malfunction press edges of
mirror. Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
Automatic Curb Monitor whenever the engine is running.
The concept Automatic dimming feature

If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐
the front passenger side is tilted downward. med. Photocells are used to control the Interior
This improves your view of the curb and other rearview mirror, refer to page 63.
low-lying obstacles when parking, e.g.
62
Adjusting Controls
Interior rearview mirror, automatic Power steering wheel adjustment

dimming feature
The concept
The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di‐

rections.
Photocells are used for control:

Storing the position
▷ In the mirror glass.
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer
▷ On the back of the mirror. to page 60.
Functional requirement Heated steering wheel

For proper operation:
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Information
Press button.
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving ▷ On: the LED lights up.
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
63
Controls Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely

The right place for children

Information Only transport children younger than 13 years
of age or shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm in the rear in
WARNING
child restraint systems provided in accordance
Unattended children or animals can with the age, weight and size of the child.
move the vehicle and endanger themselves
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. system can no longer be used due to their age,
▷ Releasing the parking brake. weight and size.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
Children on the front passenger seat
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
straint system in the front passenger seat,
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not make sure that the front, knee and side airbags
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ on the front passenger side are deactivated.
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐
and lock the vehicle.◀ ger airbags, refer to page 111.
Children should always be in the rear Information

WARNING WARNING
Persons shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm cannot Active front-seat passenger airbags can
correctly fasten the safety belt without suitable injure a child in a child restraint system when
additional restraint systems. The protective ef‐ the airbags are activated. There is risk of inju‐
fect of the safety belts can be limited or lost ries. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause ad‐ GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
ditional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident
or during braking and evasive maneuvers. WARNING
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Secure The stability of the child restraint system
persons shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suita‐ is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
ble restraint systems.◀ adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
Accident research shows that the safest place Make sure that the child restraint system fits
for children is in the back seat.
64
Transporting children safely Controls
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐ On the front passenger seat
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that Deactivating airbags
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
WARNING
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀ Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is risk of inju‐
ries. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
Installing child restraint airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
systems GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
After installing a child restraint system in the
Before mounting
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
Before mounting child restraint systems, en‐ knee and side airbags on the front passenger
sure that the rear seat backrests are locked. side are deactivated.
Move the rear seats into the rearmost position Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
to facilitate assembly of the child restraint sys‐ automatically, refer to page 111.
tem.
Seat position and height
Information
Before installing a child restraint system, move
Pay attention to the specifications of the child the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐
restraint system manufacturer when selecting, ble and adjust its height to the highest and
installing, and using child restraint systems. thus best possible position for the belt and to
WARNING offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐
The stability of the child restraint system dent.
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
adjustment or improper installation of the child cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
seat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life. move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐
Make sure that the child restraint system fits til the best possible belt guide position is
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐ reached.
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that Backrest width
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐ child restraint system in the front passenger
straints or remove them.◀ seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
not change the backrest width again and do
WARNING
not call up a memory position.
There is limited protection provided if
child restraint systems are used on the third
row of seats. There is risk of injuries or danger
to life. Do not install child restraint systems on
the third row of seats.◀
65
Child seat security Locking the safety belt

1. Pull out the strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.
3. Allow the strap to be pulled in and pull it
tight against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt

1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
2. Remove the child restraint system.
safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
ten child restraint systems. 3. Allow the strap to be pulled in completely.
The front passenger safety belt can be perma‐
nently locked to fasten child restraint systems.
LATCH child restraint system

LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐ LATCH child restraint fixing system fits se‐
dren. curely against the backrest.◀
Information Position
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐
The corresponding symbol shows the
dren.
mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐ Seats equipped with lower anchors are
mation of the child restraint system manufac‐ marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH sym‐
turer when installing and using LATCH child bols. It is not recommended to use the
restraint fixing system. inner lower anchors of standard outer
LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors system on the middle seat. Use the vehicle
The lower anchors may be used to attach the seat belt instead for the middle seat.
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Information
WARNING
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tems are not correctly engaged, the protective
effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tem can be limited. There is risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that the lower an‐
chors are securely engaged and that the
66
Transporting children safely Controls
Only mount child restraint systems to the up‐

per retaining straps.◀
Retaining strap guide

WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the protec‐
tive effect can be reduced. There is risk of inju‐
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐ ries. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
cated in the gap between the seat and back‐ not guided across sharp edges and without
rest. twisting to the upper retaining strap.◀
Before installing LATCH child

restraint systems
Pull the belt away from the area of the child re‐
straint system.
Assembly of LATCH child restraint

systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
turer's information. 1 Direction of travel
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐ 2 Head restraint
erly connected. 3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point
Child restraint fixing system with a
tether strap 5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap
Mounting points
The respective symbol shows the an‐ Attaching the upper retaining strap to
chor for the upper retaining strap. the mounting point
Seats with an upper Top Tether are 1. Raise the head restraint if needed.
marked with this symbol. It can be found on
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
the supports of the head restraint.
3. If there is a retaining strap, run it between
Information the backrest and the cargo cover.
CAUTION 4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
The mounting points for the upper re‐ the anchor.
taining straps of child restraint systems are 5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
only provided for these retaining straps. When down.
other objects are mounted, the anchors can be 6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
damaged. There is risk of property damage.
67
Securing of doors and

windows in the rear
Rear doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
The door can now be opened from the outside

only.
Safety switch for the rear

Press button on the driver's door if
children are being transported in the
rear.
This locks various functions so that they can‐

not be operated from the rear: safety switch,
refer to page 48.
68
Driving Controls
Driving
Vehicle features and options To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
This chapter describes all standard, country- electronic systems/power consumers.
series. It also describes features that are not Information
When switching off the ignition, the selector
lever position P is selected automatically if the
selector lever position D or R is selected.
provisions must be observed when using the The ignition is switched off automatically in the
respective features and systems. following situations while the vehicle is station‐
ary and the engine is off:
▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the
Start/Stop button low beams are activated.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
The concept completely, so that the engine can still be
Pressing the Start/Stop button started.
switches the ignition on or off ▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
and starts the engine. the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
The engine starts with the brake the low beams are turned off.
pedal pressed when you press ▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
the Start/Stop button. with driver's door open and low beams off.
The low beams switch to parking lights after
Ignition on approx. 15 minutes of no use.
Press the Start/Stop button, and do not press
on the brake pedal at the same time.
Radio ready state
Activate radio-ready state: when the engine is
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
running: press the Start/Stop button.
Most of the indicator and warning lights in the
Some electronic systems/power consumers
instrument cluster light up for a varied length
remain ready for operation.
of time.
The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐
To save battery power when the engine is off,
cally in the following situations:
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers. ▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐
Ignition off tral locking system.
Press the Start/Stop button again without ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
stepping on the brake. completely, so that the engine can still be
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go started.
out.
69
Controls Driving
The radio-ready state remains active if, e.g., CAUTION

the ignition is automatically switched off for the In the case of repeated starting attempts
following reasons: or repeated starting in quick succession, the
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door. fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned.
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt. The catalytic converter can overheat. There is
risk of property damage. Avoid repeated start‐
▷ When automatically switching from low
ing in quick succession.◀
beams to parking lights.
If the engine is switched off and the ignition is
Diesel engine
switched on, the system automatically
switches to the radio-ready state if the lights If the engine is cold and temperatures are be‐
are turned off or, if correspondingly equipped, low approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃, the start process may
the daytime running lights are activated. be delayed somewhat due to automatic pre‐
heating.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Starting the engine
Steptronic transmission
Information
Starting the engine
DANGER
1. Depress the brake pedal.
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can 2. Press the Start/Stop button.
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐ The ignition is activated automatically for a
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐ certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐ gine starts.
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the
exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐ Engine stop
tion.◀
Information
WARNING
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐ Unattended children or animals can
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against move the vehicle and endanger themselves
rolling. and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
against rolling away, observe the following: ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Set the parking brake. ▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the ▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
front wheels in the direction of the curb. ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀ leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
70
Driving Controls
WARNING When the Auto Start/Stop function is active, it

An unsecured vehicle can put itself into is available when the vehicle is traveling faster
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐ than about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling. Engine stop
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured The engine is switched off automatically dur‐
against rolling away, observe the following: ing a stop under the following conditions:
▷ Set the parking brake. Steptronic transmission:
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
front wheels in the direction of the curb. tion D.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure ▷ The brake pedal remains pressed while the
the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀ vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held
by Automatic Hold.
Before driving into a car wash ▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob‐ driver's door is closed.
serve instructions for going into an automatic The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
car wash, refer to page 254. when the engine is switched off.
Steptronic transmission Displays in the instrument cluster

The display indicates that the
Switching off the engine Auto Start/Stop function is
1. Engage selector lever position P with the ready for an Automatic engine
vehicle stopped. start.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off. The display indicates that the
The radio-ready state is switched on. conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met.
3. Set the parking brake.
Auto Start/Stop function Functional limitations

The engine is not switched off automatically in
The concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
▷ External temperature too low.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic ▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
lights. The ignition remains switched on. The matic climate control is running.
engine starts again automatically for driving ▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated
off. or cooled to the required level.
▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐
Automatic mode ature.
After every start of the engine using the Start/
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in
steering wheel is being turned.
the last selected state, refer to page 72.
71
Controls Driving
▷ After driving in reverse. ▷ The steering wheel is turned.

▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐
matic climate control is switched on. lector lever position D to R, N or M/S.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐
▷ At higher elevations. lector lever position P to N, D, R or M/S.
▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked. ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
matic climate control is switched on.
▷ HDC Hill Descent Control is activated.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
the heating is switched on.
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N,
M/S or R. Activating/deactivating the system
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content. manually
Starting the engine Using the button

The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
▷ Steptronic transmission:
By releasing the brake pedal.
When Automatic Hold is activated: press
the accelerator pedal.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
Press button.
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is
the following conditions are met:
deactivated.
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
The engine is started during an automatic
the driver's door is open.
engine stop.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
The engine can only be stopped or started
Some indicator lights light up for a varied via the Start/Stop button.
length of time.
▷ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is
The engine can only be started via the Start/ activated.
Stop button.
Functional limitations
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior
when the cooling function is switched on.
72
Driving Controls
Switching off the vehicle during an Setting

automatic engine stop WARNING
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
can be switched off permanently, e. g., when
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
leaving it.
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is rolling.
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
is deactivated. against rolling away, observe the following:
Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐ ▷ Set the parking brake.
matically.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
2. Set the parking brake. front wheels in the direction of the curb.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button. ▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀
Automatic deactivation
WARNING
In certain situations, Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated automatically for safety reasons Unattended children or animals can
as if the driver were absent. move the vehicle and endanger themselves
Malfunction ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
switches off the engine automatically. A Check ▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
Control message is displayed. It is possible to
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
continue driving. Have the system checked.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
Parking brake leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
The concept and lock the vehicle.◀
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi‐ Pull the switch.
cle from rolling when it is parked.
The LED lights up.
Overview
The indicator lamp lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
While driving
Use as emergency brake while driving:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the switch is being pulled.
The indicator lamp lights up red, a sig‐
nal sounds and the brake lights light
Parking brake up.
73
Controls Driving
A Check Control message is displayed. Overview

If the vehicle is slowed down to a speed of ap‐
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h the parking brake is set.
Releasing
With the ignition switched on:
Steptronic transmission: Press the
switch while the brake is pressed or se‐
lector lever position P is set.
The LED and indicator lamp go out. Automatic Hold
The parking brake is released.
Safety information
Automatic release in cars with
Steptronic transmission WARNING
For automatic release, step on the accelerator An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
pedal. motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
The LED and indicator lamp go out. dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
The parking brake is automatically released
when you step on the accelerator: In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Engine on.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Drive mode engaged.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.
front wheels in the direction of the curb.
Automatic Hold ▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure

The concept Under the following conditions, Automatic
This system assists the driver by automatically Hold is automatically deactivated and the park‐
setting and releasing the brake, such as when ing brake is set:
moving in stop-and-go traffic. ▷ The engine is switched off.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when ▷ A door is opened and driver's safety belt is
it is stationary. unbuckled while the vehicle is stationary.
On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle ▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a stand‐
from rolling backward when driving off. still using the parking brake.
The indicator lamp switches from
green to red and the letters AUTO H go
out.
74
Driving Controls
Activating Parking
This function can be activated when the driv‐ The parking brake is automatically set if the
er's door is closed, the safety belt is fastened engine is switched off while the vehicle is be‐
and the engine is running. ing held by Automatic Hold.
Press button. The indicator lamp changes from green
The LED and the letters AUTO H light to red.
up. The parking brake is not set if the en‐
gine is switched off while the vehicle is coast‐
The indicator lamp lights up. ing to a halt. Automatic Hold is deactivated.
Automatic Hold is activated.
Automatic Hold remains activated during the
engine stop brought about by the Auto Start/
Deactivating Stop function.
Press button again. WARNING
The LED and the letters AUTO H go Unattended children or animals can
out. move the vehicle and endanger themselves
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press on the brake pedal to deactivate it. ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
When the parking brake is set manually, Auto‐ ▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
matic Hold is deactivated automatically. ▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
Driving There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is au‐ leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
tomatically secured against rolling after brak‐ hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
ing to a standstill. and lock the vehicle.◀
The indicator lamp lights up green.
Step on the accelerator pedal to drive Malfunction
off. In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
The brake is released automatically. parking brake, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing using a wheel chock, e.g., when leaving it.
The indicator lamp goes out.
CAUTION
Manual release
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic WARNING
Hold engages the parking brake. It prevents An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
the vehicle from rolling in a car wash. There is motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
risk of property damage. Deactivate Automatic dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
Hold prior to entering the car wash.◀ rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
75
Controls Driving
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the Putting the parking brake into
front wheels in the direction of the curb. operation
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure 1. Switch on the ignition.
The parking brake can be released manually in 2. Press the switch while stepping on
the event of a power failure or electrical fault. the brake pedal or selector lever position P
is set.
Unlocking It may take several seconds for the brake to be
If the parking brake has been released man‐ put into operation. Any sounds associated with
ually in response to a malfunction, only quali‐ this are normal.
fied technicians should return it to operation. The indicator lamp in the instrument
1. Open the left side trim in the trunk. cluster goes out as soon as the parking
brake is ready for operation.
2. Remove the first-aid kit and warning trian‐
gle.
3. Insert the screwdriver from the onboard
vehicle tool kit under the cargo floor panel Turn signal, high beams,
into the strap of the release point, see ar‐ headlight flasher
row.
4. Forcefully pull the screwdriver up against Turn signal
the mechanical resistance until you notice
a marked increase in the resistance and Turn signal in exterior mirror
the parking brake releases audibly. When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
in the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights
on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Using turn signals
5. Stow the screwdriver, warning triangle and

first-aid kit, and close the left side trim in
the trunk.
After a power failure

Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
WARNING
The turn signal lever returns into is starting po‐
The function of the parking brake is not
sition after actuation.
ensured if it was unlocked manually without
power loss. There is risk of an accident. Only To switch off manually, slightly tap the lever to
operate the parking brake if it was unlocked the resistance point.
manually due to a power loss.◀
76
Driving Controls
Triple turn signal activation Washer/wiper system

Slightly tap lever.
The turn signal flashes three times. Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
The function can be activated or deactivated.
On the Control Display: General information
1. "Settings" Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
2. "Lighting"
them to become worn more quickly.
3. "Triple turn signal"
Settings are stored for the profile currently Information
used.
CAUTION
Signaling briefly If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
motor overheat on switching on. There is risk
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
of property damage. Defrost the windshield
to flash.
prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Malfunction WARNING
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp If the wipers start moving in the folded
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed. away state, damage may occur to parts of the
vehicle or body parts can be jammed. There is
High beams, headlight flasher risk of injuries or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
Switching on
▷ High beams, arrow 1.

▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐

sition when released.
▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
77
Controls Driving
▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once Activating/deactivating

beyond the resistance point.
Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐
hicle comes to standstill.
Switch off and brief wipe
Press button on the wiper lever.

Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equipped
with a rain sensor: LED in wiper lever lights up.
When wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper
operation is deactivated.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
During trip interruption with the rain sensor
sition when released.
switched on: if the trip is resumed within ap‐
▷ Single wipe: press down once. prox. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automati‐
▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed: cally activated again.
press down once.
▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: press CAUTION
down twice. If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in car washes.
Interval mode or rain sensor There is risk of property damage. Deactivate
the rain sensor in car washes.◀
The concept
Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
wiper operation is preset. the rain sensor
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐
shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐
ror.
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency

or sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
78
Driving Controls
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain Rear window wiper
sensor.
Switching on the rear window wiper
Clean the windshield, headlights
Turn the switch from idle position 0 upward,

arrow 1: interval mode. When reverse gear is
Pull the wiper lever towards you.
engaged, the system switches to continuous
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ operation.
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐ Cleaning rear window

lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are acti‐ In interval mode: turn the switch further, ar‐
vated. row 2. The switch automatically returns to its
WARNING interval position when released.
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐ In idle position: turn switch downward, arrow 3.
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the The switch automatically returns to its idle po‐
view. There is risk of an accident. Only use the sition when released.
washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze if needed.◀ Fold-out position of the wipers
Fold wipers back when you want to change the
CAUTION blades or with pending low temperatures.
When the wiper water container is
WARNING
empty, the wash pump cannot work as in‐
tended. There is risk of property damage. Do If the wipers start moving in the folded
not use the washer system when the wash wa‐ away state, damage may occur to parts of the
ter container is empty.◀ vehicle or body parts can be jammed. There is
risk of injuries or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
Windshield washer nozzles
when the wipers are in the folded away state
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐ and the wipers are folded in when switching
cally heated while the ignition is switched on. on.◀
1. Switch the ignition on and off again.

2. With icy conditions make sure that blades
are not frozen to the windshield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
79
Controls Driving
onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly Washer fluid reservoir

vertical position.
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.

2. Push wiper lever down. Wipers move to
their resting position and are ready again
for operation.
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐

Washer fluid
ervoir in the engine compartment.
Information Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐
centrate and tap water and – if required – with a
WARNING
washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐
Some antifreeze agents can contain turer's recommendations.
harmful substances and are flammable. There
Mix the washer fluid before adding to find the
is risk of fire and risk of injuries. Observe the
right mixture.
instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐ Do not add windshield washer concentrate and
ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐ antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure
erating materials out of reach of children. water; this could damage the wiper system.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual ferent manufacturers because they can clog
states; do not exceed the allowable washer the windshield washer nozzles.
fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the Recommended minimum fill quantity:
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐ 0.2 US gal/1 liter.
tainer.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen‐
trate or the equivalent is recommended.◀ Steptronic transmission
WARNING Selector lever positions
Improperly executed work under the
hood can damage components and lead to a D Drive
safety risk. There is risk of accidents or risk of Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐
property damage. Have work under the hood ation. All gears for forward travel are activated
be executed by a dealer’s service center or an‐ automatically.
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral:
The vehicle may roll. Use in automatic car
washes, e.g.
80
Driving Controls
When the ignition is switched off, refer to A block prevents the inadvertent switching to
page 69, selector lever position P is engaged selector lever position P or R or the inadvertent
automatically. change from selector lever position P.
P Park Engaging selector lever position D, N,

Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The R
drive wheels are blocked.
P is engaged automatically:
▷ After the engine is switched off when the
vehicle is in radio-ready state, refer to
page 69, or when the ignition is switched
off, refer to page 69, and when selector
lever position R or D is set.
▷ With the ignition off, if selector lever posi‐
tion N is set.
Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐
▷ If the driver's safety belt is released, the
rection, beyond a resistance point if needed.
driver's door is opened, and the brake
pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is After releasing the selector lever, it returns to
stationary and selector lever position D or its center position.
R is set.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐ Canceling the lock
lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve‐
hicle may begin to move.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Step on the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full throttle
position.
Engaging selector lever positions Press unlock button, arrow.
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a gear, maintain pressure on the brake
pedal until you are ready to start.
▷ It is not possible to shift out of selector
lever position P until the engine is running
and the brake is applied.
▷ With the vehicle is stationary, press on the
brake pedal before shifting out of selector
lever position P or N; otherwise, the shift
command will not be executed: shift lock.
81
Controls Driving
Engage selector lever position P Example: once maximum engine speed is at‐
tained, M/S manual mode is automatically up‐
shifted as needed.
Switching to manual mode

▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
wards.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
Press P button, arrow. and road speeds, for example downshifting is
not possible if the engine speed is too high.
Sport program and manual mode The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the currently se‐
Activating the sport program lected gear.
Steptronic Sport transmission:

prevent automatic upshifting in M/S
manual mode
The Steptronic Sport transmission does not
automatically upshift in M/S manual mode
once the maximum speed is reached, if one of
the following conditions is met:
▷ DSC deactivated.
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐ ▷ TRACTION activated.
tor lever position D. ▷ SPORT+ activated.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ In addition, there is no downshift for kickdown.
ment cluster, e.g., S1. With the respective transmission version, the
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐
vated. taneously operating the kickdown and the left
shift paddle. However, this effect is not pro‐
duced via the shift paddles when switching
Activating the M/S manual mode
briefly from selector lever position D to manual
1. Press the selector lever to the left out of mode.
selector lever position D.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it Ending the sport program/manual
backward. mode
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is Push the selector lever to the right.
changed. D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, e.g., M1.
If the situation requires, the Steptronic trans‐
mission continues to shift automatically.
82
Driving Controls
Shift paddles Displays in the instrument cluster

The selector lever position is dis‐
played, e.g.: P.
Electronic unlocking of the

transmission lock
General information
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both maneuver vehicle from the danger area.
hands on the steering wheel.
Unlocking is possible, if the started can spin
▷ Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle. the engine.
▷ Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
▷ With the respective transmission version, Engaging selector lever position N
the lowest possible gear can be selected 1. Depress the brake pedal.
by pulling and holding the left shift paddle. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine must audibly start.
and road speeds, for example downshifting is 3. Press and hold the selector lever into posi‐
not possible if the engine speed is too high. tion N.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ A corresponding Check Control message
strument cluster, followed by the current gear. is displayed.
If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are 4. Press the selector lever again into posi‐
used to shift gears in automatic mode, the tion N within approx. 6 seconds.
transmission temporarily switches to manual
Selector lever position N is displayed in the
mode.
instrument cluster.
If the selector lever is still in selector lever po‐
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter
sition D with the respective transmission ver‐
stops.
sion, it is possible to switch back into the auto‐
matic mode: 6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
and secure it against moving on its own.
▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.
or Steptronic Sport transmission:
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift Launch Control
paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.
In the manual mode, after conservative driving The concept
for a certain amount of time or if there has Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
been no acceleration or shifting of the shift on surfaces with good traction.
paddles within a certain amount of time, the
transmission switches back to automatic
mode.
83
Controls Driving
General information
The use of Launch Control causes premature
component wear since this function represents
a very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 192, period.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
Requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Start with launch control

While the engine is running:
1. Press button or select Sport+ with

the Driving Dynamics Control.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF
lights up.
2. Engage selector lever position S.
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full
throttle position, kickdown.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐
mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding
conditions, e.g., wet pavement, when used
again.
84
Displays Controls
Displays
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Fuel gauge 93 5 Engine oil temperature 93

2 Speedometer 6 Current fuel consumption
3 Messages, e.g. Check Control 7 Electronic displays 85
4 Tachometer 93 8 Reset miles 93
Electronic displays
▷ Selection lists, refer to page 97. ▷ Date, refer to page 94.
▷ External temperature, refer to page 93. ▷ Energy recovery, refer to page 95.
▷ Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 71. ▷ Transmission display, refer to page 83.
▷ On-board computer, refer to page 98. ▷ Miles/trip miles, refer to page 93.
85
Controls Displays
▷ Messages, e.g. Check Control, refer to ▷ Range, refer to page 94.

page 89. ▷ Status, Driving Dynamics Control, refer to
▷ Current fuel consumption, refer to page 142.
page 94. ▷ Service requirements, refer to page 95.
▷ Navigation display, see User's manual for ▷ Speed limit detection, refer to page 96.
Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐
▷ Time, refer to page 94.
cation.
Multifunctional instrument display

The concept
The instrument display is a variable display. In Some of the displays in the instrument display
the event of a program change, the display may differ from the way they are shown in this
rendition adapts to the respective program Owner's Manual.
through the Driving Dynamics Control. The
change of the display type can be deactivated
via iDrive.
Overview
1 Fuel gauge 93 5 Tachometer 93

2 Indicator/warning lights 89 Selection lists 97
3 Speedometer ECO PRO displays 200
4 Variable displays 6 Engine oil temperature 93
86
Displays Controls
7 On-board computer 98 8 Reset miles 93
Switching the change of display on Or "Driving mode view"

and off
You can set whether the instrument display With Professional Navigation System:
automatically changes to the ECO PRO or switching zoom function on/off
SPORT in the display when you switch driving You can program whether the current speed is
modes. to appear enlarged in the speedometer.
On the Control Display: On the Control Display:
1. "Settings" 1. "Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster" 2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "ECO PRO Info" 3. "Magnifier function"
ECO PRO displays
1 Speedometer 4 Transmission display

2 Variable displays: ECO PRO Tips, Deceler‐ 5 ▷ Blue: bonus range
ation assistant instructions, Driver assist ▷ Gray: range
system displays
3 Efficiency display 200
In the ECO PRO program the instrument dis‐ displays support a driving style that saves on
play switches to the ECO PRO displays. These fuel consumption with more prominent repre‐
87
Controls Displays
sentation of the efficiency display and various

ECO PRO tips.
Sport displays
1 Speedometer 4 Shift lights, when respectively equipped

2 Tachometer 93 5 Performance display
3 Transmission display 6 Variable displays
In the Sport and Sport+ programs the instru‐ General information

ment display switches to the sport displays. Steptronic Sport transmission: shift lights are
These displays support a sporty driving style shown, when the SPORT+ driving program is
with more prominent representation of the activated.
tachometer, the transmission displays, and the
vehicle speed. Switching on shift lights
Steptronic Sport transmission:
Shift lights in the instrument display
1. Select SPORT+ using the Driving Dynam‐
The concept ics Control.
The shift point indicator indicates the optimum 2. Activate the M/S manual mode of the
shift moment in the tachometer. Thus, with a transmission.
sporty driving style, the best possible vehicle
acceleration is achieved.
88
Displays Controls
Display in the instrument display Indicator/warning lights
General information
The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐
ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐
nations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
▷ Current engine speed is displayed in the Red lights

tachometer.
Safety belt reminder
▷ Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated
fields indicate an increase in the speed. Safety belt on the driver's side is not
▷ Arrow 2: successive orange illuminated buckled. For some country-specific
fields indicate the upcoming shift moment. models: passenger belt is not worn or
objects are detected on the front passenger
▷ Arrow 3: fields are illuminated in red. Do seat.
not wait any further to shift.
Flashing or illuminated: safety belt on the
When the maximum possible speed is driver or passenger side is not buckled. The
reached, the entire display flashes. When the safety belt reminder can also be activated if
maximum speed is exceeded, the supply of objects are placed on the front passenger seat.
fuel is interrupted in order to protect the en‐
gine. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
Check Control Airbag system

Airbag system and belt tensioner are
The concept not working.
The Check Control system monitors functions
Have the vehicle checked immediately
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
in the monitored systems.
fied service center or repair shop.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights and
Parking brake
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display. The parking brake is set.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a For additional information, refer to Re‐
text message may appear on the Control Dis‐ lease parking brake, refer to page 74.
play.
Brake system
89
Controls Displays
Braking system disrupted. Continue to Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control

drive moderately.
Illuminated: vehicle driving ahead de‐
Have the vehicle checked immediately tected.
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
Flashing: the conditions are not ade‐
fied service center or repair shop.
quate for operating the system.
The system was deactivated but applies the
Front-end collision warning brakes until you actively resume control by
Illuminated: advance warning is issued, pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
e.g., when there is the impending dan‐ pedal.
ger of a collision or the distance to the
vehicle ahead is too small. Yellow lights
Increase distance.
Flashing: acute warning of the imminent dan‐ Anti-lock Braking System ABS
ger of a collision when the vehicle approaches Avoid sudden braking as much as pos‐
another vehicle at a relatively high differential sible. Braking force boost may not be
speed. working. Stop cautiously. Take into ac‐
Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐ count the longer brake distance. Have
neuver. checked immediately by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified
Pedestrian warning
Symbol in the instrument cluster.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
If a collision with a person detected in
this way is imminent, the symbol lights Flashing: DSC controls the drive and
up and a signal sounds. braking forces. The vehicle is stabi‐
lized. Reduce speed and adapt driving
Symbol in the instrument display. style to the driving circumstances.
If a collision with a person detected in Illuminated: DSC failed. Have system checked
this way is imminent, the symbol lights immediately by a dealer’s service center or an‐
up and a signal sounds. other qualified service center or repair shop.
For additional information, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC, refer to page 138.
Orange lights
Active Cruise Control DSC Dynamic Stability Control is

deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
The number bars shows the selected
Control is activated
distance from the vehicle driving
ahead. Dynamic Stability Control DSC is
For additional information, refer to Active switched off or Dynamic Traction Con‐
Cruise Control with Stop & Go function, ACC, trol DTC is switched on.
refer to page 145. For additional information, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC, refer to page 138, and
90
Displays Controls
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to Have steering system checked immediately by
page 139. a dealer’s service center or another qualified
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
Engine functions
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
tire inflation pressure in a tire. Have vehicle checked immediately by a
Reduce your speed and stop cau‐ dealer’s service center or another
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐ qualified service center or repair shop.
neuvers. For additional information, refer to On-board
For more information, see Flat Tire Monitor, re‐ Diagnostics socket, refer to page 239.
fer to page 116.
Lane departure warning
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM System is switched on and under cer‐
Illuminated: the Tire Pressure Monitor tain circumstances warns if a detected
signals a loss of tire inflation pressure lane is left without flashing beforehand.
in a tire. For additional information, refer to Lane depar‐
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid ture warning, refer to page 131.
sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Flashing and then continuously illuminated: no Green lights
flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be
detected. Turn signal
▷ Interference through systems or devices Turn signal switched on.
with the same radio frequency: After leav‐ Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
ing the area of the interference, the system lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb
automatically becomes active again. has failed.
▷ TPM could not conclude the reset: perform For additional information, refer to Turn signal,
the reset of the system again. refer to page 76.
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted: Have it checked by a dealer’s
Parking lights, headlight control
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed. Parking lights or headlights are acti‐
▷ Malfunction: Have system checked imme‐ vated.
diately by a dealer’s service center or an‐ For additional information, refer to
other qualified service center or repair Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, re‐
shop. fer to page 104.
For more information, see Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor, refer to page 112. Front fog lights
Front fog lights are activated.
Steering system
For additional information, refer to
Steering system in some cases not Front fog lights, refer to page 107.
working.
91
Controls Displays
High-beam Assistant Supplementary text messages

High-beam Assistant is switched on. Additional information, such as on the cause of
an error or the required action, can be called up
High beams are activated and off auto‐
via Check Control.
matically as a function of the traffic sit‐
uation. With urgent messages the added text will be
automatically displayed on the Control Display.
For additional information, refer to High-beam
Assistant, refer to page 106.
Symbols
Depending on the Check Control message, the
Cruise control following functions can be selected.
The system is switched on. It maintains ▷ "Owner's Manual"
the speed that was set using the con‐
Display additional information about the
trol elements on the steering wheel.
Check Control message in the Integrated
Owner's Manual.
Automatic Hold ▷ "Service request"
Function is activated. The vehicle is au‐ Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
tomatically held in place when it is sta‐ other qualified service center or repair
tionary. shop.
For more information, see Automatic Hold, re‐ ▷ "Roadside Assistance"
fer to page 74. Contact Roadside Assistance.
Blue lights Hiding Check Control messages
High beams
High beams are activated.
For additional information, refer to High
beams, refer to page 77.
General lamps
Check Control
Press and hold PC button on blinker lever.
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored. ▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐
played continuously and are not cleared
until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐
Text messages eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐
Text messages in combination with a symbol sages are displayed consecutively.
in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐ These messages can be faded for approx.
trol message and the meaning of the indicator 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
and warning lights. played again automatically.
92
Displays Controls
▷ Other Check Control messages are faded ▷ Normal operating temperature: the pointer
automatically after approx. 20 seconds. is in the middle or in the left half of the tem‐
They are stored and can be displayed perature display.
again later. ▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of
the temperature range. A Check Control
Displaying stored Check Control message is also displayed.
messages
1. "Vehicle info" Coolant temperature
2. "Vehicle status" If the coolant along with the engine becomes
3. "Check Control" too hot, a Check Control message is displayed.
4. Select the text message. Check the coolant level, refer to page 236.
Messages after trip completion

Special messages displayed while driving are Odometer and trip odometer
displayed again after the ignition is switched
off. Display
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Fuel gauge
Vehicle tilt position may cause
the display to vary.
Depending on the equipment
Show/reset kilometers
version, the arrow beside the
fuel pump symbol shows which Press the knob.
side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on. ▷ When the ignition is
Hints on refueling, refer to page 208. switched off, the time, the
external temperature and
the odometer are displayed.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
Tachometer odometer is reset.
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐
rupted to protect the engine.
External temperature
If the indicator drops to
Engine oil temperature +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal
sounds.
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end. A Check Control message is
Drive at moderate engine displayed.
and vehicle speeds. There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
93
Controls Displays
WARNING ensured. There is risk of property damage. Re‐

Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃ fuel promptly.◀
there can be a danger of icy roads, e.g. on
bridges or shady sections of road. There is risk Displaying the cruising range
of an accident. Adjust your driving style to the Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
weather conditions at low temperatures.◀ the range can also be displayed as bar in the
instrument cluster.
1. "Settings"
Time
2. "Instrument cluster"
The time is displayed at the bot‐
3. "Additional indicators"
tom of the instrument cluster.
Setting the time and time for‐ With navigation system: range with
mat, refer to page 100. destination guidance active
If respective equipment is fitted
and destination guidance is ac‐
Date tive, the remaining range is dis‐
The date is displayed in the on- played when the destination is
board comupter. reached.
Setting the date and date for‐
mat, refer to page 101.
Current fuel consumption
Range Display
Depending on your vehicle's op‐
Display
tional features, the current fuel
With a low remaining range: consumption can be displayed
▷ A Check Control message is in the instrument cluster. Check
displayed briefly. whether you are currently driv‐
ing in an efficient and environmentally-friendly
▷ The remaining range is
manner.
shown on the onboard com‐
puter.
▷ With a dynamic driving style, e.g. taking Displaying the current fuel
curves aggressively, the engine function is consumption
not always ensured. 1. "Settings"
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km. 3. "Additional indicators"
CAUTION The bar display for the current fuel consump‐

tion is displayed in the instrument cluster.
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are no longer
94
Displays Controls
Energy recovery Symbols
Display Sym‐ Description

bols
The kinetic energy of the vehicle
is converted to electrical energy No service is currently required.
while coasting. The vehicle bat‐
tery is partially charged and fuel
consumption can be reduced. The deadline for scheduled mainte‐
nance or a legally mandated inspec‐
tion is approaching.
Service requirements The service deadline has already

passed.
The concept
After the ignition is turned on the instrument
cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐
Entering appointment dates
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐ Enter the dates for the required inspections.
nance. Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
A service advisor can read out the current set correctly.
service requirements from your remote con‐ On the Control Display:
trol.
1. "Vehicle info"
Display 2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Detailed information on service 4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
requirements
5. "Date:"
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ 6. Adjust the settings.
play. 7. Confirm.
1. "Vehicle info" The entered date is stored.
2. "Vehicle status"
Automatic Service Request
3. "Service required"
Data regarding the service status or legally
Required maintenance procedures and le‐ mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed. cally transmitted to your dealer’s service cen‐
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐ ter before a service due date.
tion. You can check when your dealer’s service cen‐
ter was notified.
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
95
Controls Displays
Gear shift indicator the navigation system and also displays speed
limits present on routes without signs.
The concept
Information
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
cient gear for the current driving situation. WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
General information personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐ bility and traffic situation. There is risk of an ac‐
try version of the vehicle, the gear shift indica‐ cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
tor is active in the manual mode of the Step‐ conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
tronic transmission. interfere in the respective situations.◀
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. Overview
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed. Camera
Displays
Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐

view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
Speed limit detection terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
The concept
Switching on/off
Speed limit detection On the Control Display:
Speed limit detection shows the current maxi‐ 1. "Settings"
mum permitted speed in the instrument clus‐
ter. The camera in the area of the interior rear‐
view mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of 3. "Speed limit information"
the road as well as variable overhead sign If speed limit detection is switched on, it can
posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet be displayed on the info display in the instru‐
road conditions, etc. are also detected and ment cluster via the on-board comupter.
compared with the vehicle's onboard data,
such as for the rain sensor, and will be dis‐ Display
played depending on the situation. The system The following is displayed in the instrument
takes into account the information stored in cluster:
96
Displays Controls
Speed limit detection Selection lists in the

Current speed limit. instrument cluster
The concept
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the following can be displayed or operated us‐
Speed limit detection is not ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the
available. steering wheel as well as the displays in the in‐
strument cluster and the Head-up Display:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.
Speed limit detection can also be displayed in
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
the Head-up Display.
Display
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are concealed by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ the list in the instrument cluster can differ from
ered by a sticker, etc. the illustration shown.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the

camera. Activating a list and adjusting the
setting
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in road routing.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ On the right side of the steering wheel, turn
ately after vehicle delivery. the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding
list.
97
Controls Displays
Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐ ▷ Distance to destination.

ting and confirm it by pushing the thumbwheel. When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Compass display in the navigation system.
On-board computer
Adjusting the info display
Indication in the info display Depending on the vehicle equipment version,
The information from the on- you can select what information from the on-
board computer is shown in the board computer is to be displayed on the info
info display in the instrument display of the instrument cluster.
cluster. On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
Calling up information on the info 2. "Instrument cluster"
display 3. Select the desired displays.
Information in detail
Range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
It is calculated based on your driving style over
the last 20 miles/30 km.
Press and hold PC button on blinker lever. Average fuel consumption

Information is displayed in the info display of The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the instrument cluster. the period while the engine is running.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
Information at a glance the distance traveled since the last reset by the
on-board comupter.
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn
signal lever calls up the following information in
Average speed
the info display:
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
▷ Range.
engine manually stopped are not included in
▷ Average consumption, fuel. the calculation of the average speed.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Speed limit detection.
▷ Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
98
Displays Controls
Resetting average values ▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an

overview of the current trip.
Resetting the trip on-board computer

1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
"Automatically reset": all values are reset
Press and hold PC button on blinker lever. approx. 4 hours after the vehicle came to a
standstill.
Distance to destination Display on the Control Display

The distance remaining to the destination is Display the on-board comupter or trip on-
displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐ board computer on the Control Display.
gation system before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐ 1. "Vehicle info"
tomatically. 2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Time of arrival Resetting the fuel consumption or

speed
The estimated time of arrival is
displayed if a destination is en‐ On the Control Display:
tered in the navigation system 1. "Vehicle info"
before the trip is started.
2. "Onboard info"
The time must be correctly set.
3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"
4. "Yes"
Speed limit detection
Description of the speed limit detection, refer
to page 96, function. Sport displays
Compass The concept
With a navigation system: com‐ On the Control Display, the current values for
pass display for the driving di‐ performance and torque can be displayed if
rection. the vehicle is appropriately equipped.
Displaying sport displays on the

Control Display
Trip on-board computer 1. "Vehicle info"
The vehicle features two types of on-board 2. "Sport displays"
computers.
▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
often as necessary.
99
Controls Displays
Speed warning Settings on the Control

Display
The concept
Displays a speed, when reached, should cause Time
a warning to be issued.
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed Setting the time zone
drops below the set speed once by at least 1. "Settings"
3 mph/5 km/h. 2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time zone:"
Displaying, setting or changing the
speed warning 4. Select the desired time zone.
On the Control Display: The time zone is stored.
1. "Settings" Setting the time

2. "Speed" 1. "Settings"
3. "Warning at:" 2. "Time/Date"
4. Turn the controller until the desired speed 3. "Time:"
is displayed.
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
5. Press the controller. are displayed.
Speed warning is stored. 5. Press the controller.
6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐
Activating/deactivating the speed
nutes are displayed.
warning
The time is stored.
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed" Setting the time format
3. "Warning" 1. "Settings"
4. Press the controller. 2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
Setting your current speed as the
4. Select the desired format.
speed warning
The time format is stored.
1. "Settings" Automatic time setting
2. "Speed" Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
3. "Select current speed" the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically.
The current vehicle speed is stored as the 1. "Settings"
speed warning. 2. "Time/Date"
3. "Auto time set"
100
Displays Controls
Date Units of measurement
Setting the date Setting the units of measurement

1. "Settings" To set the units for fuel consumption, route/
2. "Time/Date" distance and temperature:
3. "Date:" 1. "Settings"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is 2. "Language/Units"
displayed. 3. Select the desired menu item.
5. Press the controller. 4. Select the desired unit.
6. Make the necessary settings for the month Settings are stored for the profile currently
and year. used.
The date is stored.
Brightness
Setting the date format
1. "Settings" Setting the brightness
2. "Time/Date" To set the brightness of the Control Display:
3. "Format:" 1. "Settings"
4. Select the desired format. 2. "Control display"
The date format is stored. 3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
Language ness is set.
Setting the language
To set the language on the Control Display:
used.
1. "Settings" Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
2. "Language/Units" ness settings may not be clearly visible.
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
Head-up Display
used. Overview
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 27.
101
Controls Displays
The concept Selecting displays in the Head-up

This system projects important information Display
into the driver's field of vision, e. g., the speed. On the Control Display:
The driver can get information without averting 1. "Settings"
his or her eyes from the road.
2. "Head-Up Display"
Information 3. "Displayed information"
Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head- 4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
up Display, refer to page 257. Display.
Display visibility used.
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by the following factors: Setting the brightness
▷ Certain sitting positions. The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play. The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. On the Control Display:
▷ Wet roads. 1. "Settings"
▷ Unfavorable light conditions. 2. "Head-Up Display"
If the image is distorted, have the basic set‐ 3. "Brightness"
tings checked by a dealer’s service center or 4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
another qualified service center or repair shop. ness is set.
Switching on/off
1. "Settings" When the low beams are activated, the bright‐
ness of the Head-up Display can be addition‐
2. "Head-Up Display" ally influenced using the instrument lighting.
3. "Head-Up Display" Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Display
Adjusting the height
Overview
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display: 1. "Settings"
▷ Speed. 2. "Head-Up Display"
▷ Navigation system. 3. "Height"
▷ Check Control messages. 4. Turn the controller until the desired height
▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster. is reached.
▷ Driver assistance systems. 5. Press the controller.
Some of this information is only displayed Settings are stored for the profile currently
briefly as needed. used.
102
Displays Controls
Setting the rotation

The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐
tated around its own axis.
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Rotation"
4. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
used.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double im‐
ages from being displayed.
For this reason, it is strongly suggested to
have the special windshield replaced by a
103
Controls Lights
Lights
Vehicle features and options Symbol Function
This chapter describes all standard, country- Parking lights
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to Low beams
systems. The respectively applicable country Instrument lighting
Overview Parking lights, cornering

lights and roadside parking
Switches in the vehicle lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver door is opened with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
cally switched off at these switch settings.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The light switch elements is located next to the
steering wheel. The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐
Light functions riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery
and it would then be impossible to start the en‐
Symbol Function gine.
When parking, switch on the one-sided road‐
Front fog lights
side parking lamp, refer to page 105.
Automatic headlight control

Low beams
Position of switch:
Adaptive Light Control
The low beams light up when the ignition is
Lights off switched on.
Daytime running lights
104
Lights Controls
Roadside parking lights Headlight courtesy delay feature

The low beams stay lit for a short while if the
headlight flasher is switched on after the radio-
ready state is switched off.
Setting the duration

1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side. 3. "Pathway lighting:"
4. Set length of time.
Switching on Settings are stored for the profile currently
With the ignition switched off, press the lever used.
either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.
Automatic headlight control
Switch off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in The concept
the opposite direction. The low beams are switched on and off auto‐
matically depending on the ambient bright‐
ness, e.g. in tunnels, in twilight or if there is
Welcome lights and precipitation.
headlight courtesy delay
feature General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
Welcome lights cause the lights to be switched on.
Depending on the equipment, when switching When emerging from a tunnel during the day,
off the vehicle, switch position or . the low beams are not switched off immedi‐
The parking and interior lights light up briefly ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes.
when the vehicle is unlocked and depending The low beams always stay on when the fog
on the ambient brightness. lights are activated.
Activating/deactivating Activating
On the Control Display: Position of switch:
1. "Settings" The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster

lights up when the low beams are switched on.
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome lights" System limits
Settings are stored for the profile currently The automatic headlamp control cannot serve
used. as a substitute for your personal judgment of
lighting conditions.
105
Controls Lights
E. g. the sensors are unable to detect fog or Activating

hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under Position of switch with the ignition
these conditions, you should always switch on switched on.
the lights manually.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐
er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
Daytime running lights
The turning lights are automatically switched
Position of switch: , , on depending on the steering angle or the use
The daytime running lights light up when the of turn signals.
ignition is switched on. After the ignition is When driving in reverse, the turning lights may
switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐ be automatically switched on regardless of the
tion . steering angle.
Activating/deactivating Self-leveling headlights

In some countries, daytime running lights are The self-leveling headlights compensate for
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐ acceleration and braking operations in order
vate the daytime running lights. not to blind the oncoming traffic and to achieve
On the Control Display: optimum illumination of the roadway.
1. "Settings" Malfunction
2. "Lighting" A Check Control message is displayed.
3. "Daytime running lamps" Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or has
Settings are stored for the profile currently failed. Have the system checked as soon as
used. possible.
Adaptive Light Control High-beam Assistant

The concept The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight When the low beams are activated, this system
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐ automatically switches the high beams on and
tion of the road surface. off or suppresses the light in the areas that
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐ blind oncoming traffic. The procedure is con‐
rameters, the light from the headlight follows trolled by a camera on the front of the interior
the course of the road. rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the
high beams are activated whenever the traffic
In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or
situation allows. The driver can intervene at
when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating
any time and switch the high beams on and off
lamp is switched on that lights up the inside of
as usual. In the low speed range, the high
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
beams are not switched on by the system.
certain speed.
106
Lights Controls
Activating ▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
The High-beam Assistant can be switched off

when manually adjusting the light.
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press
the button on the turn signal lever, refer to
page 107.
System limits
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal judgment of
1. Depending on the equipment, turn the light
when to use the high beams. In situation that
switch into position or .
require this, therefore switch off manually.
2. Press button on the turn signal lever, ar‐
The system is not fully functional in situations
row.
such as the following, and driver intervention
The indicator lamp in the instrument may be necessary:
cluster lights up. ▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐
tomatically brightened or dimmed. ▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
The system responds to light from oncoming
and wagons; when driving close to train or
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐ sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
ment cluster lights up when the system coming traffic on freeways.
switches on the high beams. Depend‐
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
ing on the version of the system in the vehicle,
presence of highly reflective signs.
the high beams may not switch off for oncom‐
ing vehicles, but may only be dimmed in the ▷ When the windshield behind the interior
areas that blind oncoming traffic. In this case, rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
the blue indicator light will stay on. ered with stickers, etc.
Switching the high beams on and off

manually
Fog lights
Front fog lights
The low beams must be switched on.
Press button. The green indicator
lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to

page 105, is activated, the low beams will
come on automatically when you switch on the
front fog lights.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
107
Controls Lights
When the high beams or headlight flasher are Switch back on: press button.
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
on. Reading lights
Press button.
Instrument lighting Reading lights are located at the front and rear
next to the interior lights.
Adjusting
The parking lights or low beams Ambient light
must be switched on to adjust Depending on your optional features lighting
the brightness. can be adjusted for some lights in the interior.
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel. Selecting color scheme
1. "Settings"
Interior lights 2. "Lighting"
General information 3. "Lighting design"
The interior lights, footwell lights, access lights 4. Select desired setting.
and courtesy lights are controlled automati‐ To deactivate the ambient light: "Off".
cally.
Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐ Setting the brightness
trols brightness of some of these features. On the Control Display:
Overview 1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Brightness:"
4. Adjust the brightness.
1 Interior lights
2 Reading lamp
Switching the interior lights on and off

Press button.
To switch off permanently: press the button for

approx. 3 seconds.
108
Safety Controls
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag
3 Head airbag
Front airbags Side airbag

Front airbags help protect the driver and front In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in side of the body in the chest and lap area.
which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐
equate restraint. Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
109
Controls Safety
Ejection Mitigation ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front

The head airbag system is designed as an passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants not attach brackets or cables, e. g., for GPS
through side windows during rollovers or side devices or' mobile phones.
impact events. ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
Knee airbag ▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal other objects on the front passenger seat
impact. that are not specifically suited for seats
with integrated side airbags.
Protective action ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ jackets, over the backrests.
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
collisions. nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
Information for optimum effect of the the dashboard, and the seats.
airbags
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
WARNING Even when you follow all instructions very
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐ closely, injury from contact with the airbags
ployment area of the airbags is impacted, the cannot be ruled out in certain situations.
airbag system cannot protect as intended or The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
cause additional injuries due to triggering. short-term and, in most cases, temporary
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Ob‐ hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.
serve the Information for optimum protective
effect of the airbag system.◀ Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads Functional readiness of the airbag
away from the side airbag. system
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
Information
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep WARNING
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as Individual components can be hot after
low as possible when the airbag is trig‐ triggering of the airbag system. There is risk of
gered. injuries. Do not touch individual components.◀
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and WARNING
legs in the floor area. Improperly executed work can lead to
▷ There should be no persons, animals or failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
objects between an airbag and a person. of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
tion, the airbag system could not trigger as in‐
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
tended in the event of an accident despite re‐
bag cover panels, do not cover them or
spective accident severity. There is risk of
modify them in any way.
110
Safety Controls
injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag sys‐ Malfunction of the automatic
tem checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap‐ deactivation system
ped by a dealer’s service center or another When transporting older children and adults,
qualified service center or repair shop.◀ the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
Correct function the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up.
When the ignition is switched on, the
warning lamp in the instrument cluster In this case, change the sitting position so that
lights up briefly and thereby indicates the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
the operational readiness of the entire airbag and the indicator lamp goes out.
system and the belt tensioner. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
Airbag system malfunctioning To enable correct recognition of the occupied
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the seat cushion
ignition is turned on. ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously. or other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically determined to
be safe for use on the front passenger
Automatic deactivation of the front-
seat.
seat passenger airbags
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
The concept passenger seat if a child restraint system is
The system reads if the front passenger seat is to be installed on it.
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐ ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
sistance. could press against the seat from below.
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐ ▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
senger's side are either activated or deacti‐
vated. Indicator lamp for the front-seat
passenger airbags
Information
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
WARNING
The ensure the front-seat passenger air‐
bag function, it must be detected, whether a
person occupies the front passenger seat. The
entire seat cushion area must be used for this The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐
purpose. There is risk of injuries or danger to ger airbags indicates the operating state of the
life. Make sure that the front passenger keeps front-seat passenger airbags.
his or her feet in the floor area.◀ The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
ther activated or deactivated.
111
Controls Safety
▷ The indicator lamp lights up A corresponding message appears on the

when a child is properly Control Display.
seated in a child restraint fix‐
1. Press the switch and move the respective
ing system or when the seat
seat all the way forward.
is empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not 2. Press the switch forward again. The seat
activated. still moves forward slightly.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when, 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient The calibration procedure is completed when
size is detected on the seat. The airbags the message on the Control Display disap‐
on the front passenger side are activated. pears.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
Detected child seats peat the calibration.
The system generally detects children seated If the message does not disappear after a re‐
in a child seat, particularly in child seats re‐ peat calibration, have the system checked as
quired by NHTSA when the vehicle was manu‐ soon as possible.
factured. After installing a child seat, make
sure that the indicator lamp for the front-seat
passenger airbags lights up. This indicates
that the child seat has been detected and the
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.
The concept
Strength of the driver's and front-seat The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
passenger airbag the four mounted tires. The system warns you
if there is a significant loss of pressure in one
The explosive power that activates driver's/
or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the
front passenger's airbags very much depends
tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure
on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐
and tire temperature.
er's seat.
With a respective message appearing on Con‐ Information
trol Display calibrate the front seats to keep
With use of the system observe further infor‐
the accuracy of this function over the long-
mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐
term.
fer to page 215.
Calibrating the front seats
WARNING The system must have been reset with the
There is risk of jamming when moving correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐
the seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss is
property damage. Make sure that the area of not assured.
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐ Reset the system after each adjustment of the
justment.◀ tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
ensure that the system will operate properly.
112
Safety Controls
Status display Carry out reset

The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐ Reset the system after each adjustment of the
tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active. wheel change.
On the Control Display: On the Control Display and on the vehicle:
1. "Vehicle info" 1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status" 2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)" 3. "Perform reset"
The status is displayed. 4. Start the engine - do not drive off.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform
Status control display reset".
Tire and system status are indicated by the 6. Drive away.
color of the wheels and a text message on the
The wheels are displayed in gray and the sta‐
Control Display.
tus is displayed.
All wheels green After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
System is active and will issue a warning rela‐
accepted as reference values. The reset is
tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during
completed automatically while driving.
the last reset.
The progress of the reset is displayed.
One wheel is yellow After a successfully completed Reset, the
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in wheels on the Control Display are shown in
the indicated tire. green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
active" is displayed.
All wheels are yellow You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in you continue the reset resumes automatically.
several tires.
Low tire pressure message
Wheels, gray The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons Check Control message is displayed.
for this may be: ▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in
▷ The system is being reset. tire inflation pressure.
▷ Malfunction. ▷ No reset was performed for the system.
The system therefore issues a warning
Status information based on the tire inflation pressures before
The status control display additionally shows the last reset.
the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
pending on the model, tire temperatures. It
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
shows the actual values read; they may vary
vers.
depending on driving style or weather condi‐
tions. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
113
Controls Safety
Run-flat tires, refer to page 225, are la‐ Run-flat tires

beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. Maximum speed
WARNING You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
Continued driving with a flat tire
such as steering and braking response. Run-
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires. vers.
Observe the information on run-flat tires and
continued driving with these tires.◀ 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC the next opportunity.
Dynamic Stability Control.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is shown to be correct, it is possible that
Actions in the event of a flat tire
the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform
a reset. In that case, carry out a reset.
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire. Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires. The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐
The tire pressure gage of the Mobility Sys‐ ing style and road conditions.
tem, refer to page 225, can possibly be
used for this purpose. A vehicle with an average load has a possible
driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
is shown to be correct, it is possible that A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐
the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during
a reset. Then perform the reset. braking, a longer braking distance and different
self-steering properties. Adjust your driving
If identification of flat tire damage is not style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
possible, please contact a dealer’s service neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,
center or another qualified service center potholes, etc.
or repair shop.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
2. Replace the damaged tire with the emer‐ pends on how the vehicle is used during the
gency wheel as needed or fix it where ap‐ trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐
plicable with the Mobility System. ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐
Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System, ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In
WARNING
this case, have the electronics checked at the
next opportunity and have them replaced if Your vehicle handles differently when a
needed. run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missing
tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is
reduced when braking, braking distances are
114
Safety Controls
longer and the self-steering properties will may cause a warning when temperatures fall
change. There is risk of an accident. very sharply.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of The system cannot indicate sudden serious
50 mph/80 km/h.◀ tire damage caused by external circumstances.
Final tire failure Malfunction

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐ The yellow warning lamp flashes and
cate the final failure of a tire. then lights up continuously. A Check
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of Control message is displayed. No flat
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐ tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐
dent. tected.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s Examples and recommendations in the follow‐
service center or another qualified service cen‐ ing situations:
ter or repair shop. ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted: Have it checked by a dealer’s
Required tire inflation pressure check service center or another qualified service
message center or repair shop as needed.
A Check Control message is displayed in the ▷ Malfunction: Have system checked by a
following situations dealer’s service center or another qualified
▷ The system has detected a wheel change, service center or repair shop.
but no reset was done. ▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
▷ Inflation was not carried out according to Reset the system again.
specifications. ▷ Interference through systems or devices
▷ The tire inflation pressure has fallen below with the same radio frequency: After leav‐
the level of the last confirmation. ing the area of the interference, the system
In this case: automatically becomes active again.
▷ Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
▷ Carry out a reset of the system after a tire System
change.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
System limits
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
The system does not function properly if a re‐ by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
reported though tire inflation pressures are vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
correct. indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
The tire inflation pressure depends on the pressure label, you should determine the
tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
inflation pressure is reduced when the tire system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
temperature falls again. These circumstances sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
115
Controls Safety
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you the corresponding wheel changes. This will be
should stop and check your tires as soon as detected and reported as a flat tire.
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐ The system does not measure the actual infla‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tion pressure in the tires.
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐ Functional requirements
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
The system must have been initialized when
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
even if under-inflation has not reached the
every tire or wheel change.
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
Status display
cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐ The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐ be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
tor is combined with the low tire pressure whether or not the FTM is active.
telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐ On the Control Display:
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illumi‐ 1. "Vehicle info"
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐ 2. "Vehicle status"
sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐ 3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"
function exists. When the malfunction indicator
The status is displayed.
is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
Initialization
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace‐ When initializing the once set inflation tire
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle pressures serve as reference values in order to
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐ detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐ firming the tire inflation pressures.
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels Do not initialize the system when driving with
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement snow chains.
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS On the Control Display:
to continue to function properly.
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 3. "Perform reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive off.
The concept
5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset".
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐ 6. Drive away.
tween the individual wheels while driving. The initialization is completed while driving,
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the which can be interrupted at any time.
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
116
Safety Controls
Indication of a flat tire Actions in the event of a flat tire

The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire
inflation pressure. Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. The tire pressure gage of the Mobility Sys‐
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ tem, refer to page 225, can possibly be
vers. used for this purpose.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
normal tires or run-flat tires. is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
Run-flat tires, refer to page 225, are la‐ have been initialized. In this case, initialize
beled with a circular symbol containing the the system.
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. If identification of flat tire damage is not
WARNING possible, please contact a dealer’s service
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐ center or another qualified service center
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, or repair shop.
such as steering and braking response. Run- 2. Replace the damaged tire with the emer‐
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is gency wheel as needed or fix it where ap‐
risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if plicable with the Mobility System.
the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires.
Observe the information on run-flat tires and Run-flat tires
continued driving with these tires.◀
Maximum speed
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on if needed. You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
System limits
Continued driving with a flat tire
A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all
four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
check the tire inflation pressure regularly. 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐ vers.
nal circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐ 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
vance.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
The system could be delayed or malfunction in the next opportunity.
▷ When the system has not been initialized. is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road have been initialized. In this case, initialize
surface. the system.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction Possible driving distance with complete loss of
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting). tire inflation pressure:
▷ When driving with snow chains.
117
Controls Safety
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire how the vehicle is equipped, Intelligent Safety
inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐ consists of one or more systems that can help
ing style and road conditions. prevent a imminent collision.
A vehicle with an average load has a possible ▷ Front-end collision warning, refer to
driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km. page 119.
A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐ ▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 125.
ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during ▷ Lane departure warning, refer to
braking, a longer braking distance and different page 131.
self-steering properties. Adjust your driving
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to
style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
page 133.
neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,
potholes, etc.
Information
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the WARNING
trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐ Indicators and warnings do not relieve
ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐ from the personal responsibility. Due to sys‐
ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc. tem limits, warnings or reactions of the system
may not be output or they may be output too
WARNING
late or incorrectly. There is risk of an accident.
Your vehicle handles differently when a Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missing tions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is fere in the respective situations.◀
reduced when braking, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will WARNING
change. There is risk of an accident. Due to system limits, individual functions
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
50 mph/80 km/h.◀ with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g. approach control warning with light brak‐
Final tire failure ing function. There is risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
tow-starting/towing.◀
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
Overview
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Button in the vehicle
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
ter or repair shop.
Intelligent Safety
The concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance system. Depending on
118
Safety Controls
Intelligent Safety button Front-end collision warning

with City Braking function
Switching on/off
The concept
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
The system can help prevent accidents. If an
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
gent Safety systems activate according to the
help reduce the collision speed.
last setting.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
Press button briefly: nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety ently if needed.
system is displayed. The systems The automatic braking intervention is done
are individually switched off ac‐ with limited force and duration.
cording to their respective set‐
A camera in the area of the rearview mirror
tings.
controls the system.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐
The front-end collision warning is available
tive to their individual settings.
even if cruise control has been deactivated.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
stored for the profile currently used.
intentionally, the collision warning and braking
Press button again: are delayed in order to avoid false system re‐
actions.
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
General information
▷ The LED lights up green.
The system warns at two levels of an imminent
danger of collision at speeds from approx.
Hold down button:
3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are the current driving situation.
turned off.
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
▷ The LED goes out. 35 mph/60 km/h.
Detection range
Front-end collision warning
Depending on the equipment, the collision
warning system consists of one of the follow‐
ing functions:
▷ Front-end collision warning with City Brak‐
ing function, refer to page 119.
▷ Front-end collision warning with braking
function, refer to page 122
It responds to objects if they are detected by
the system.
119
Controls Safety
Information Camera
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from the personal responsibility. Due to sys‐
tem limits, warnings or reactions of the system
may not be output or they may be output too
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
fere in the respective situations.◀
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
WARNING view mirror.
Due to system limits, individual functions Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
ing function. There is risk of an accident. Switching on/off
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀ Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
Overview driving-off.
Button in the vehicle Switching on/off manually

Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off ac‐
tings.
Intelligent Safety button stored for the profile currently used.
Press button again:

activated.
Hold down button:

turned off.
▷ The LED goes out.
120
Safety Controls
Setting the warning time Acute warnings can also be triggered without
The warning time can be set via iDrive. previous forewarning.
1. "Settings" Braking intervention

2. "Frontal Coll. Warning" The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
3. Activate the desired time on the Control to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
Display. ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐
The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐ ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on
rently used. the brake pedal. The system can assist with
some braking intervention if there is risk of a
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
Warning with braking function
come to a complete stop.
Display The braking intervention is executed only if
If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐ DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐ and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display. vated.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
Symbol Measure stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
Symbol lights up red: prewarning. tively moving the steering wheel.
Brake and increase distance. Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
of the detection range and functional restric‐
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic tions are to be considered.
signal sounds: acute warning.
You are requested to intervene by System limits
braking or make an evasive maneu‐
ver. Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Prewarning Thus a system reaction might not come or
This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the might come late.
impending danger of a collision or the distance E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
to the vehicle ahead is too small. tected:
The driver must intervene actively when there ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
is a prewarning. them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
Acute warning with braking function you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
Acute warning in displayed in case of the immi‐ ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
proaches another object at a relatively high dif‐
ferential speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there
The system may not be fully functional in the
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
following situations:
assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐
vention in a possible risk of collision. ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
fall.
121
Controls Safety
▷ In tight curves. are delayed in order to avoid false system re‐

▷ If the driving stability control systems are actions.
limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF.
General information
▷ If, depending on the vehicle equipment
version, the field of view of the camera in The system issues a two-phase warning of a
the mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob‐ possible danger of collision with vehicles at
scured. speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of
warnings may vary with the current driving sit‐
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
uation.
gine, via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ Detection range
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
e.g. the warning time, the more warnings are
displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐
cess of false warnings.
It responds to objects if they are detected by
the system.
Collision warning with

Information
braking function
WARNING
The concept Indicators and warnings do not relieve
The system can help prevent accidents. If an from the personal responsibility. Due to sys‐
accident cannot be prevented, the system will tem limits, warnings or reactions of the system
help reduce the collision speed. may not be output or they may be output too
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐ late or incorrectly. There is risk of an accident.
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐ Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
ently if needed. tions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
The automatic braking intervention may be
executed with maximum braking force and for WARNING
a brief period only as necessary.
Due to system limits, individual functions
If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
Control with Stop & Go, the front-end collision with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
warning is controlled via the cruise control ra‐ e.g. approach control warning with light brak‐
dar sensor in conjunction with a camera. ing function. There is risk of an accident.
The front-end collision warning is available Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
even if cruise control has been deactivated. tow-starting/towing.◀
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally, the collision warning and braking
122
Safety Controls
Overview Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐

terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.
Switching on/off manually

Intelligent Safety button
Radar sensor
tings.
Press button again:

activated.
The radar sensor is located in the lower area of ▷ The LED lights up green.
the front bumper.
Hold down button:
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
turned off.
Camera
Setting the warning time

The warning time can be set via iDrive.
1. "Settings"
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
3. Activate the desired time on the Control
Display.
The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐ rently used.
view mirror.
123
Controls Safety
Warning with braking function a collision. The intervention can bring the vehi‐
cle to a complete stop.
Display The braking intervention is executed only if
If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐ DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐ and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display. vated.
Symbol Measure Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h the braking

intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure.
Symbol lights up red: prewarning. No automatic delay occurs.
Brake and increase distance. The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
tively moving the steering wheel.
signal sounds: acute warning.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneu‐
tions are to be considered.
ver.
System limits
Prewarning
This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the Detection range
impending danger of a collision or the distance The system's detection potential is limited.
to the vehicle ahead is too small. Thus a system reaction might not come or
The driver must intervene actively when there might come late.
is a prewarning. E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
Acute warning with braking function
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
Acute warning in displayed in case of the immi‐ them at high speed.
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
proaches another object at a relatively high dif‐
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
ferential speed.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
assisted by an automatic braking intervention
in a possible risk of collision. Functional limitations
Acute warnings can also be triggered without The system may not be fully functional in the
previous forewarning. following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
Braking intervention fall.
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself ▷ In tight curves.
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ ▷ If the driving stability control systems are
ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF.
ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on
the brake pedal. The system can assist with ▷ If, depending on the vehicle equipment
automatic braking intervention if there is risk of version, the field of view of the camera in
124
Safety Controls
the mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob‐ General information

scured. With sufficient brightness, the system warns
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐ about possible collision danger with pedes‐
gine, via the Start/Stop button. trians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap‐
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking
ately after vehicle delivery. before a collision.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐ Under those circumstances it reacts to people
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun who are within the detection range of the sys‐
low in the sky. tem.
Warning sensitivity Detection range

The more sensitive the warning settings are,
e.g. the warning time, the more warnings are
displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐
cess of false warnings.
Pedestrian warning
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the
function warns of an imminent collision with
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
pedestrians during daytime or nighttime.
ided into two areas
The function is subdivided into the following
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
systems:
vehicle.
▷ During daytime: Pedestrian warning with
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
city braking function, refer to page 125
left.
▷ At night: Night vision, refer to page 127
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
Pedestrian warning with city the extended area only if they are moving in
braking function the direction of the central area.
The concept
Information
The system can help prevent accidents with
pedestrians. WARNING
The system issues a warning in the city driving Indicators and warnings do not relieve
speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐ from the personal responsibility. Due to sys‐
lision with pedestrians and includes a braking tem limits, warnings or reactions of the system
function. may not be output or they may be output too
The camera in the area of the rearview mirror
controls the system.
tions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
125
Controls Safety
WARNING Switching on/off

Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing Switching on automatically
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated, The system is automatically active after every
e.g. approach control warning with light brak‐ driving-off.
ing function. There is risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to Switching on/off manually
tow-starting/towing.◀
Overview system is displayed. The systems
Button in the vehicle cording to their respective set‐
tings.
Press button again:

activated.
Intelligent Safety button
Hold down button:

Camera
turned off.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐ instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
view mirror. The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ nal sounds.
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
With instrument display: The red sym‐
bol is displayed and a signal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an

evasive maneuver.
126
Safety Controls
Braking intervention ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐

The warning prompts the driver himself/herself fall.
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ ▷ In tight curves.
ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ ▷ If the driving stability control systems are
ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF.
the brake pedal. The system can assist with
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the front
some braking intervention if there is risk of a
windshield are dirty or covered.
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop button.
The braking intervention is executed only if
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ ately after vehicle delivery.
vated. ▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
The braking intervention can be interrupted by cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ low in the sky.
tively moving the steering wheel. ▷ When it is dark outside.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
tions are to be considered. Night Vision with Pedestrian
and Animal Detection
System limits
The concept
Detection range Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐
The detection potential of the camera is lim‐ tion is a night vision system.
ited.
An infrared camera scans the area in front of
Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐ the vehicle and issues a warning if it detects
sued late. pedestrians and animals on the street. Warm
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐ objects that are similar in shape to human be‐
tected: ings or animals are detected by the system. If
▷ Partially covered pedestrians. necessary, the heat image can be displayed on
the Control Display.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of the viewing angle or contour.
Heat image
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
The system may not be fully functional in the
The image shows the heat radiated by objects
in the field of view of the camera.
127
Controls Safety
Warm objects have a light appearance and ▷ Detection of large animals: up to approx.
cold objects a dark appearance. 490 ft/150 m
The ability to detect an object depends on the ▷ Detection of medium animals: up to ap‐
temperature difference between the object prox. 230 ft/70 m
and the background and on the level of heat Environmental influences can limit the availa‐
radiation emitted by the object. Objects that bility of object detection.
are similar in temperature to the environment
If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is
or that radiate very little heat are difficult to de‐
located in a residential area, the animal detec‐
tect.
tion is temporarily switched off.
For safety reasons, when driving at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambi‐ Information
ent light, the image is only displayed when the WARNING
low beams are activated.
A still image is displayed at regular intervals for personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
a fraction of a second. bility and traffic situation. There is risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
Pedestrian and animal detection conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
interfere in the respective situations.◀
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Object detection and warning only functions in

darkness.
Objects whose form is similar to people with
sufficient heat radiation are detected.
In addition, the system also detects animals
above a certain minimum size, e.g., deer. Intelligent Safety button
Display on the Control Display with heat image
activated:
▷ People detected by the system: in light
yellow.
▷ Animals detected by the system: in dark
yellow.
Range of object detection, with good ambient

conditions:
▷ Pedestrian detection: up to approx.
330 ft/100 m
128
Safety Controls
Switch on/switch off heat image ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are turned
off.
Camera
Switching on heat image additionally

The heat image from the Night Vision camera
can also be displayed on the Control Display.
This function has no effect on object detec‐
tion.
Press button.
The image from the camera is displayed on the

The camera is automatically heated when the Control Display.
external temperatures are low.
The camera lens is automatically cleaned to‐ Adjustments via the iDrive
gether with the headlights. With heat image switched on:

Switching on/off
2. Select brightness or contrast.
Switching on automatically ▷ Select the symbol.
When it is dark outside, the system is automat‐ ▷ Select the symbol.
ically active after every driving-off. 3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety Display
are individually switched off ac‐ Warning of people or animals in
cording to their respective set‐ danger
tings. If a collision with a person or an animal de‐
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐ tected in this way is imminent, a warning sym‐
tive to their individual settings. bol appears on the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
stored for the profile currently used. Although both the shape and the heat radiation
are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled
Press button again: out.
activated.
Hold down button:
129
Controls Safety
Warning area in front of the vehicle Acute warning

The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
With instrument display: The red sym‐

bol is displayed and a signal sounds.
When animals are detected, an red animal

symbol is displayed with the signal tone.
Red symbol in the instrument cluster.
The warning area for the pedestrian warning
consists of two parts:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the Red symbol in the instrument display.
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and Intervene immediately by braking or make an
left. evasive maneuver.
With animal warnings, no distinction is made
between the central or expanded area. Display in the Head-up Display
The entire area moves along with the vehicle in The warning is displayed simultane‐
the direction of the steering angle and changes ously in the Head-up Display and on
with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed the instrument cluster. The displayed
increases, the area becomes longer and wider, symbol can vary with the people detected.
e.g.
When animals are detected, an animal symbol
is displayed.
Prewarning
The yellow symbol is displayed when a System limits
person is detected in the central area
immediately in front of the vehicle. Basic limits
The yellow symbol is displayed when a person System operation is limited in situations such
in the extended area is moving from the right as the following:
or left towards the central area. ▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in
The displayed symbol can vary with the people tight curves.
detected. ▷ When the camera is dirty or the protective
Intervene actively by braking or make an eva‐ glass is damaged.
sive maneuver. ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
When animals are detected, an animal ▷ At very high external temperatures.

symbol is displayed. The symbol also
shows the side of the road on which Limits of pedestrian and animal
the animal was detected. Intervene actively by detection
braking or make an evasive maneuver. In some situations, it may occur that pedes‐
trians are detected as animals or animals as
pedestrians.
130
Safety Controls
Small animals are not detected by the object interfere in the respective situations. In the
detection function, even if they are clearly visi‐ event of a warning, do not unnecessarily jerk
ble in the image. the steering wheel.◀
Limited detection, e.g. in the following circum‐
stances: Overview
▷ People or animals who are fully or partially
covered, especially when their heads are Button in the vehicle
covered.
▷ People who are not in an upright position,
e.g., lying down.
▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g.,
recumbent bicycles).
▷ After physical damage to the system, e.g.,
after an accident.
No display on the rear screen

The image from Night Vision cannot be dis‐ Intelligent Safety button
played on the rear screen.
Camera
Lane departure warning
The concept
Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts
you when the vehicle on streets with lane
markings is about to leave the lane. This
speed, depending on the country version, is
between 35 mph/55 km/h and
45 mph/70 km/h.
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
the event of warnings. The time of the warning view mirror.
may vary depending on the current driving sit‐ Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
uation. terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane. Switching on/off
Information Switching on automatically

WARNING The lane departure warning is automatically
The system does not relieve from the activated after departure, if the function was
personal responsibility to correctly assess switched on the last time the engine was stop‐
route and traffic situation. There is risk of an ped.
accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
131
Controls Safety
Switching on/off manually End of warning

Press button briefly: The warning is canceled in the following situa‐
tions:
system is displayed. The systems ▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
are individually switched off ac‐ ▷ When returning to your own lane.
cording to their respective set‐ ▷ When braking hard.
tings.
▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are The system may not be fully functional in the
stored for the profile currently used. following situations:
Press button again: ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are ▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
activated. ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
Hold down button: ice, dirt or water.
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
turned off. ▷ When the lane markings are covered by
▷ The LED goes out. objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ Lines: system is activated.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
was detected and warnings can be
ered with stickers, etc.
issued.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
Display in the instrument display
▷ Symbol orange: system is acti‐
vated.
▷ Green symbol: at least one lane
marking was detected and warn‐
ings can be issued.
Issued warning
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating.
If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.
132
Safety Controls
Active Blind Spot Detection Overview
The concept Button in the vehicle
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor Intelligent Safety button
the area behind and next to the vehicle at
speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
Radar sensors
The system indicates whether there are vehi‐
cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing is dim‐
med.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐
uations described above.
The lamp in the exterior mirror housing flashes
and the steering wheel vibrates. The radar sensors are located in the rear
bumper.
Information
WARNING Switching on/off
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐ Switching on automatically
bility and traffic situation. There is risk of an ac‐ The Active Blind Spot Detection is automati‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic cally activated after departure, if the function
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively was switched on the last time the engine was
interfere in the respective situations.◀ stopped.

tings.
133
Controls Safety
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐ Brief flashing

tive to their individual settings. A brief flashing of the lamp during vehicle un‐
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are locking serves as system self-test.
System limits
Press button again: The system may not be fully functional in the
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are following situations:
activated. ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
▷ The LED lights up green. much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
Hold down button:
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
turned off. ▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
with stickers.
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.
Display
For US owners only
Lamp in the exterior mirror housing
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ NBG009014A.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Information stage ▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
The dimmed lamp in the exterior mirror hous‐ ference, and
ing indicates when there are vehicles in the ▷ this device must accept any interference
blind spot or approaching from behind. received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARNING
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the these devices could void the user's authority to
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly operate this equipment.
and the lamp in the exterior mirror housing
flashes brightly.
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the
critical zone.
134
Safety Controls
Brake force display be detected in time. There is risk of an acci‐

dent. Make sure that the driver is rested and
The concept alert. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐
ditions.◀
Function
The system is activated each time the engine
is started and cannot be switched off.
After travel has begun, the system is trained
about the driver, so that increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue can be detected.
This procedure takes the following criteria into
▷ During normal brake application, the outer account:
and inner top brake lamps light up. ▷ Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav‐
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner ior.
lower brake lamps light up in addition. ▷ Driving conditions, e.g., length of trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the
system is active and can display a recommen‐
Active Protection dation to take a break.
General information Break recommendation

The Active Protection safety package consists If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or
of systems that are independent of each other: fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control
▷ Attentiveness assistant. Display with the recommendation to take a
break.
▷ PreCrash.
A recommendation to take a break is displayed
▷ PostCrash
only once during an uninterrupted trip.
Attentiveness assistant After a break, another recommendation to take

a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
The concept mately 45 minutes.
The system can detect increasing lack of alert‐

System limits
ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo‐
notonous journeys, e.g., on highways. In this The function may be limited in the following
situation, it is recommended that the driver situations, for instance, and will either output
takes a break. an incorrect warning or no warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
Information ▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
WARNING about 43 mph/70 km/h.
The system does not relieve from the ▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
personal responsibility to correctly assess rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
one's physical state. An increasing lack of ▷ In active driving situations, such as when
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or not changing lanes frequently.
135
Controls Safety
▷ When the road surface is poor. ▷ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof.
▷ In the event of strong side winds. ▷ For vehicles equipped with Comfort Seats:
automatic positioning of the backrest for
PreCrash the front passenger seat.
After a critical driving situation without an acci‐
The concept dent, the front belts are loosened again. All
With this system critical driving situations that other systems can be restored to the desired
might result in an accident can be detected setting.
above a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. In If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐
these situations, preventive measures are au‐ cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt
tomatically taken to minimize the risk of an ac‐ using the red button in the buckle. Fasten the
cident as much as possible. belt before continuing on your trip.
Critical driving situations may include:
▷ Emergency stop. PostCrash
▷ Severe understeering. In the event of an accident, the system can
bring the car to a halt automatically without in‐
▷ Severe oversteering.
tervention by the driver in certain situations.
If the vehicle includes the front-end collision This can reduce the risk of a further collision
warning or front-end collision warning with and the consequences thereof.
braking feature, impending collisions with vehi‐
Depressing the brake pedal can cause the ve‐
cles driving ahead or stopped in front of you
hicle to brake harder. This interrupts automatic
can also be detected within the system's
braking. Destepping on the gas pedal also in‐
range.
terrupts automatic braking.
Information After coming to a halt, the brake is released

automatically. Secure the vehicle against roll‐
WARNING ing.
personal responsibility. Due to the system lim‐
its, critical situation could not be detected reli‐
ably or in time. There is risk of an accident. Ad‐
just the driving style to the traffic conditions.
Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in
the respective situations.◀
Function
After the safety belt is buckled, the front belts
are automatically pretensioned once after the
vehicle is driven is away.
In critical driving situations, the following indi‐
vidual functions become active as needed:
▷ The front belts are automatically preten‐
sioned.
▷ Automatic closing of the windows.
136
Driving stability control systems Controls
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options Drive-off assistant
This chapter describes all standard, country- This system supports driving off on inclines.
specific and optional features offered with the The parking brake is not required.
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
also applies to safety-related functions and 2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
systems. The respectively applicable country out delay.
provisions must be observed when using the After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
respective features and systems. held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer
is used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
Anti-lock Braking System
ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during Automatic Differential Brake
braking. The system controls the driving force by auto‐
The vehicle contains its steering power even matic braking intervention on individual
during full brake applications, thus increasing wheels. The function corresponds to a differ‐
active safety. ential lock: the system detects if a wheel be‐
gins to spin, because of loose road surface,
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
e.g., and automatically brakes it.
gine.
The driving force is diverted to the wheel with
better traction.
Brake assistant As a result, the engine force is transferred
more efficiently to the wheels during accelera‐
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
tions.
automatically produces the greatest possible
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during emergency stop.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided Dynamic Performance
by ABS. Control DPC
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal The Dynamic Performance Control increases
for the duration of the emergency stop. both the agility of the vehicle as well as the
lane stability.
The system seamlessly handles the distribu‐
Adaptive brake assistant tion of the drive torque between the two rear
In combination with the Active Cruise Control, wheels.
this system ensures that the brakes respond Depending on the situation, the drive torque is
even more rapidly when braking in critical sit‐ shifted from the wheel on the inside of the
uations.
137
Controls Driving stability control systems
curve to the wheel on the outside of the curve to the elevated center of gravity. There is risk
or vice-versa. of accidents or risk of property damage. Do not
To increase the maneuverability, the rear deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC
wheel on the outside of the curve is acceler‐ when driving with roof load.◀
ated when the driving style is correspondingly
sporty. Overview
The steering responds directly; simultane‐
ously, the understeering tendency of the four- Button in the vehicle
wheel drive is reduced.
With the oversteering tendency, the system
exerts a stabilizing effect by accelerating the
rear wheel on the inside of the curve.
The system noticeably improves the traction
and simultaneously increases the driving
safety, especially on road surfaces having fluc‐
tuating coefficients of friction.
DSC OFF button

DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
Indicator/warning lights
The concept The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
DSC prevents traction loss in the power trols the drive and braking forces.
wheels when driving off and accelerating. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐ failed.
tions such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Within
the physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehi‐
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
cle on a steady course by reducing engine
speed and by applying brakes to the individual When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
wheels. reduced during acceleration and when driving
in curves.
Information To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
Adapt your driving style to the situation, for an again as soon as possible.
appropriate driving style is always the respon‐
sibility of the driver. Deactivating DSC
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, not Press and hold this button but not lon‐
even with DSC. ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety
strument cluster and displays DSC OFF.
margin by driving in a risky manner.
The DSC system is switched off.
WARNING
The steering and, depending on the equip‐
When driving with roof load, e.g. with
ment, suspension are tuned for sporty driving.
roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety may
not be ensured in driving-critical situations due
138
Activating DSC TRACTION is displayed in the instrument clus‐

ter and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights
Press button.
up.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
Deactivating DTC
Indicator/warning lights Press button again.
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐ TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐
played in the instrument cluster. tor lamp go out.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is

deactivated. Indicator/warning lights
If DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
DTC Dynamic Traction The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy‐
namic Traction Control is activated.
Control
The concept
The DTC system is a version of the DSC where xDrive
forward momentum is optimized.
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐
The system ensures maximum headway on hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC
special road conditions or loose road surfaces, further optimize traction and driving dynamics.
e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐ The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐
what limited driving stability. tributes the drive forces to the front and rear
Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC axles as demanded by the driving situation and
provides maximum traction. Driving stability is road surface.
limited during acceleration and when driving in
curves. Display on the Control Display
Therefore drive with appropriate caution.
Displaying xDrive view
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances: 1. "Vehicle info"
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, 2. "xDrive status"

snow-covered roads. 3. "xDrive view"
▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or The following information is displayed:
driving off from loose grounds. ▷ With a navigation system: compass display
▷ When driving with snow chains. for the driving direction
▷ Pitch attitude with degree and percentage
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
▷ Transverse gradient with degree indication
Traction Control
▷ Graphic display for the steering
Activating DTC
Press button.
139
Displaying distribution of the drive

torque
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "xDrive status"
3. "Torque distribution"
HDC Hill Descent Control

▷ Press the rocker switch up to the point of
The concept resistance: the speed increases gradually.
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto‐ ▷ Press up the rocker switch past the point
matically controls vehicle speed on steep of resistance: the speed increases while
downhill gradients. Without applying the the rocker switch is pressed.
brakes, the vehicle moves at slightly more than
▷ Press the rocker switch down to the point
walking speed.
of resistance: the speed decreases gradu‐
Hill Descent Control can be activated at ally.
speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When
▷ Press the rocker switch down past the
driving downhill, the vehicle reduces its speed
point of resistance: when driving forward,
to approx. walking speed and then keeps its
the speed decreases to approx.
speed constant.
6 mph/10 km/h; when reversing, the speed
As long as there is active braking, the system decreases to approx. 4 mph/6 km/h.
is on standby. The system does not brake the
vehicle during this time.
Activating HDC
Only use HDC in low gears or in selector lever
position D or R.
Increasing or decreasing vehicle

speed
Specify desired speed in the range from ap‐
prox. 4 mph/6 km/h to approx. 15 mph/25 km/h
using the rocker switch of the cruise control on
the steering wheel. Vehicle speed can be
changed by lightly accelerating.
Press button; the LED above the button
lights up.
Deactivating HDC
Press button again and the LED goes
out. HDC is automatically deactivated
above approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.
140
Display in the instrument cluster Programs

The selected speed is displayed The system offers two different programs.
in the speedometer. Select the programs via the Driving Dynamics
▷ Green: the system is actively Control, refer to page 142.
braking the vehicle.
▷ Orange: the system is on
SPORT
standby. Sporty tuning for greater driving agility.
COMFORT
Malfunction
Comfort-oriented tuning for optimal comfort.
A message is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter. HDC is not available, e.g., due to elevated
brake temperatures.
Vertical Dynamic Control
The concept
Active Steering
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
Active Steering varies the steering angle of the tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
wheels in relation to the steering wheel move‐ eling on uneven road surfaces.
ment as a function of the speed. The system enhances driving dynamics and
At lower speeds, for example during turning or comfort fitting road surface and driving style.
maneuvering, the steering angle is increased,
that is to say the steering becomes more di‐ Programs
rect. The system offers several different programs.
At higher speeds, the steering angle is increas‐ Select the programs via the Driving Dynamics
ingly reduced. Control, refer to page 142.
This enables even more precise handling at
high speeds and more responsive steering SPORT/SPORT+
with reduced steering angle at low speeds. Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐
sorbers for greater driving agility.
Active roll stabilization COMFORT/ECO PRO

Balanced tuning.
The concept
The system reduces the lateral inclination of
the vehicle that occurs during rapid driving in
Self-leveling suspension
curves or during quick evasive maneuvers.
Driving stability and driving comfort are in‐ The concept
creased under all driving conditions. The sys‐ The self-leveling suspension keeps the vehicle
tem utilizes active stabilizer bars on the front height and ground clearance constant. The
and rear axles that react immediately to all driv‐ height of the vehicle at the rear axle is main‐
ing situations. tained at a predefined level under all load con‐
ditions.
141
The system ensures consistent comfort by Operating the programs

keeping spring travel constant in all driving sit‐
uations. Press button Program
DSC OFF
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed. The TRACTION
system is disrupted. Vehicle handling may be SPORT+
altered and driving comfort may be noticeably
SPORT
reduced. Visit the nearest dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair COMFORT
shop. ECO PRO
Automatic program change

Driving Dynamics Control
The system may automatically switch to COM‐
FORT in the following situations:
The concept
▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
The Driving Dynamics Control can be used to
adjust the driving dynamics of the vehicle. For ▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
this purpose various programs are available for ▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control, Dy‐
selection that are activated via the two buttons namic Drive or xDrive.
of the Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC
▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐
OFF-button.
TION or DSC OFF mode.
Overview DSC OFF

Button in the vehicle Driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in curves.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF

Press and hold this button but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and displays DSC OFF.
The DSC system is switched off.
Activating DSC
Press button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
142
Indicator/warning lights Activating SPORT+

When DSC OFF is activated, DSC OFF is dis‐ Press button repeatedly until SPORT+
played in the instrument cluster. appears in the instrument cluster and
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC OFF the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up.
is activated.
Automatic program change
TRACTION When switching on the manual speed limiter or
Maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC activating cruise control, the program automat‐
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. Driv‐ ically switches to SPORT mode.
ing stability is limited during acceleration and
when driving in curves. Indicator/warning lights
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Activating TRACTION The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up:
Press button. Dynamic Traction Control is activated.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC SPORT
OFF lights up.
Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension
and engine control for greater driving agility
Deactivating TRACTION with maximum driving stabilization.
Press button again. The program can be configured to individual
specifications.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐
tor lamp go out. The configuration is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
Indicator/warning lights Activating SPORT

If TRACTION is activated, TRACTION is dis‐
Press button repeatedly until SPORT
played in the instrument cluster.
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: TRAC‐
TION is activated.
COMFORT
For a balanced tuning with maximum driving
SPORT+ stabilization.
Sporty driving with optimized suspension and
adapted engine control with limited driving sta‐ Activating COMFORT
bilization.
Press button repeatedly until COM‐
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. FORT is displayed in the instrument
The driver handles several of the stabilization cluster.
tasks.
In certain situations, the system automatically
changes to the NORMAL program, automatic
program change, refer to page 142.
143
ECO PRO To do so, make the following settings:

ECO PRO, refer to page 200, provides consis‐ 1. "Settings"
tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for
2. "Control display"
maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐
zation. 3. "Driving mode info"
Comfort functions and the engine controller
are adjusted.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications.
Activating ECO PRO

Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO

1. Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
Make the desired settings.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Selected program
The instrument cluster displays
the selected program.
Program selection
Pressing the button displays a
list of the selectable programs.
Depending on your vehicle's op‐
tional features, the list in the in‐
strument cluster can differ from
the illustration shown.
Display on the Control Display

Program changes can be displayed briefly on
the Control Display.
144
Driving comfort Controls
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options As soon as the road is clear, the vehicle accel‐
erates to the desired speed.
The speed is also maintained downhill, but
may not be maintained uphill if engine power is
insufficient.
General information
systems. The respectively applicable country Depending on the driving settings, the features
provisions must be observed when using the of the cruise control can change in certain
respective features and systems. areas.
Information
Active Cruise Control with WARNING
Stop & Go function, ACC The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
The concept traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
Use this system to select a desired speed that tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
the vehicle will maintain automatically on clear situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
roads. the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
To the extent possible, the system automati‐
spective situations.◀
cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle
ahead of you. WARNING
The distance that the vehicle maintains to the An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
vehicle ahead of you can be varied. motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
For safety reasons, it depends on the speed. dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐ rolling.
tomatically reduces the speed, applies the In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehi‐ against rolling away, observe the following:
cle ahead begins moving faster. ▷ Set the parking brake.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and ▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐ front wheels in the direction of the curb.
riod, the system is able to detect this within the
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
given system limits. Your own vehicle will
brake automatically and then accelerate again.
If the vehicle ahead of you drives away again
after a prolonged period, briefly press the ac‐
celerator pedal or press the appropriate button
to reactivate the system. The vehicle will auto‐
matically accelerate.
145
Controls Driving comfort
Overview Camera
A camera serves to detect vehicles.
Buttons on the steering wheel
Press but‐ Function

ton
Cruise control on/off, interrupt,

refer to page 146
Store/maintain speed, refer to

page 147
Resume speed, refer to The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
page 148 view mirror.
Reduce distance, refer to Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
page 148 terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Increase distance, refer to

page 148 Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Rocker switch:
Maintain, store, change speed, Switching on
refer to page 147
Press button on the steering wheel.
Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
series, optional features and country specifica‐ light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
tions. to the current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
Radar sensor
DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper
switched on if needed.
for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the
vehicle.
Switch off
To switch off the system while standing, step
on brake pedal at the same time.
▷ If active: press twice.

▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed. Interrupting
146
If interrupting the system while stationary, ▷ Suddenly swerving vehicle onto the own
press on the brake pedal at the same time. lane.
The system is automatically interrupted in the ▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
following situations: There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Watch
▷ When the brakes are applied. traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐ spective situations.◀
gaged.
▷ When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is Maintaining/storing the speed
activated or DSC is deactivated. Press button.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability. Or:
▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control.
▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are
opened while the vehicle is standing still.
▷ If the system has not detected objects for
an extended period, e.g., on a road with
very little traffic without curb or shoulder
markings.
▷ If the detection range of the radar is dis‐
rupted, e.g., by dirt or heavy fog. Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
▷ After a longer stationary period when the terrupted.
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the
system. When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
Maintaining, storing, and changing the speed.
speed This is displayed in the speedometer and
briefly in the instrument cluster, refer to
Information page 148.
WARNING DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐ switched on if needed.
justed or called up by mistake. There is risk of
an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the Changing the speed
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐ Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
tively interfere in the respective situations.◀ until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
WARNING
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
Risk of accident due to too high speed road is clear.
differences to other vehicles, e.g. in the follow‐
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
ing situations:
the point of resistance, the desired speed
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving increases or decreases by approx.
vehicle. 1 mph/1 km/h.
147
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed While standing

past the point of resistance, the desired The system brought the vehicle to a complete
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐ standstill:
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
▷ Green marking in the speedometer:
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
Your vehicle accelerates automatically as
action.
soon as the vehicle in the range of the ra‐
dar sensor moves off.
Distance
▷ Speedometer markings turn orange: no au‐
WARNING tomatic driving off.
The system does not relieve from the To accelerate to the desired speed auto‐
personal responsibility. Due to the system lim‐ matically, press the accelerator or press
its, braking can be late. There is risk of acci‐ the RES or SET button.
dents or risk of property damage. Be aware to
the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the dis‐ Rolling bars in the distance display indicate
tance to the traffic and weather conditions and that the vehicle detected by the radar sensor
maintain the prescribed safety distance, possi‐ has driven off.
bly by braking.◀ The system was paused or your vehicle was
brought to a halt actively through stepping on
the brake pedal and it is standing behind an‐
Reduce distance
other vehicle:
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
1. Press button to call up a stored
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐ desired speed.
tance, refer to page 149. 2. Release the brake pedal.
3. Step on the accelerator briefly, or press the
Increase distance RES rocker switch when the vehicle ahead
Press button repeatedly until the de‐ of you drives away.
sired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐
tance, refer to page 149. Desired speed
▷ The marking lights up green:
Calling up the desired speed and
the system is active.
distance
▷ The marking lights up or‐
While driving ange: the system has been
interrupted.
Press button with the system
switched on. ▷ The marking does not light up: the system
is switched off.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again: With instrument display: the symbol is
displayed in the speedometer similarly
▷ When the system is switched off.
to the mark for the desired speed.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
148
Brief status display Indicator/warning lights

Selected desired speed. Symbol lights up orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐ Symbol flashes orange:
rently fulfilled.
The conditions are not adequate for
the system to work.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Shown is selected distance to the vehicle driv‐ The system was deactivated but applies the
ing ahead of you. brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
Distance display pedal.
Distance 1
Symbol flashes red and a signal
sounds:
Distance 2 You are requested to intervene by

braking or make an evasive maneuver.
Distance 3 Displays in the Head-up Display

Some system information can also be dis‐
played in the Head-up Display.
Distance 4
This value is set automatically after Distance information
the system is switched on. The symbol is displayed when the dis‐
The system has been interrupted or tance from the vehicle traveling ahead
distance control is temporarily sup‐ is too short.
pressed because the accelerator The distance information is active under the
pedal is being pressed; a vehicle following circumstances:
was not detected. ▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.
Distance control is temporarily sup‐ ▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected,
pressed because the accelerator refer to page 101.
pedal is being pressed; a vehicle ▷ Distance too short.
was detected.
▷ Speed greater than approx.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven 40 mph/70 km/h.
away.
ACC is no longer accelerating. To accelerate System limits
further, activate ACC by briefly stepping on
the accelerator pedal, pressing the RES but‐ Speed range
ton or rocker switch. The system is best used on well-constructed
roads.
149
The minimum speed that can be set is Swerving vehicles

20 mph/30 km/h. The maximum speed that
can be set depends on the vehicle.
The system can also be activated when sta‐
tionary.
Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐
uation when using the system.
Detection range
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected

until it is completely within the same lane as
your vehicle.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,
The detection capacity of the system and the when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐
automatic braking capacity are limited. hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected,
the system requests that the driver intervene
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not
by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐
be detected.
vers, if needed.
Deceleration WARNING
The system also does not decelerate in the fol‐ The system does not relieve from the
lowing situations: personal responsibility to correctly assess the
▷ For pedestrians or similar slow-moving traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
road users. tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
▷ For red traffic lights. the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
▷ For cross traffic. traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
▷ For oncoming traffic. spective situations.◀
150
Cornering Weather
In the event of unfavorable weather and light
conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall, slush,
fog or glare, this may result in poorer recogni‐
tion of vehicles as well as short-term interrup‐
tions for vehicles that are already detected.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, e.g.
by braking, steering or evading.
Malfunction
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐ The system cannot be activated if the radar
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be
into a curve at an appropriate speed. caused by damage incurred during parking,
e.g.
In tight curves the system offers only restricted
detection where a vehicle ahead of you might A Check Control message is displayed if the
be detected late or not at all. system fails.
The function for detecting and responding
when approaching stationary vehicles may be
limited in the following situations:
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
▷ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A
Check Control message is displayed.
Cruise control
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to
The concept
the bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐
ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐ The system maintains a preset speed via the
ating. buttons on the steering wheel. The system
brakes on downhill gradients if engine braking
After releasing the gas pedal the system is re‐
is insufficient.
activated and controls speed independently.
General information
Driving away Depending on the driving settings, the features
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off of the cruise control can change in certain
automatically; for example: areas.
▷ On steep inclines.
▷ From behind bumps in the road.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
151
Information Switch off

WARNING WARNING
The use of the system can lead to an in‐ The system does not relieve from the
creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐ personal responsibility to correctly assess the
tions: traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
▷ On winding roads. tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
▷ In heavy traffic.
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
on a loose road surface. spective situations.◀
There is risk of accidents or risk of property
damage. Only use the system if driving at con‐ Press button on the steering wheel.
stant speed is possible.◀
▷ If active: press twice.
Overview ▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
Buttons on the steering wheel is deleted.
Press but‐ Function Interrupting

ton
When active, press the button.
Cruise control on/off, interrupt,
refer to page 152 The system is automatically interrupted in the
Store/maintain speed, refer to
page 153 ▷ When the brakes are applied.
▷ If selector lever position D is disengaged.
Resume speed, refer to
page 153 ▷ If DTC Dynamic Traction Control is acti‐
vated or DSC is deactivated.
Rocker switch:
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
Maintain, store, change speed,
▷ If HDC is activated.
refer to page 153
▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control.
Controls
Maintaining, storing, and changing the
Switching on speed
Information
The marking in the speedometer is set to the WARNING
current speed.
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
The cruise control can be used. justed or called up by mistake. There is risk of
DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
switched on if needed. traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively interfere in the respective situations.◀
152
Maintaining/storing the speed celerates the vehicle without requiring

pressure on the accelerator pedal.
Press button.
After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐
Or:
hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Resuming the desired speed

Press button.
The stored speed is reached and maintained.

Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted. Indicator lamp
When the system is switched on, the current Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
speed is maintained and stored as the desired ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐
speed. ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐
This is displayed, refer to page 153, in the tem is switched on.
speedometer and briefly in the instrument
cluster. Desired speed
DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be
▷ The marking lights up green:
switched on if needed.
the system is active.
Changing the speed ▷ The marking lights up or‐
ange: the system has been
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
interrupted.
until the desired speed is set.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
is switched off.
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear. With instrument display: the symbol is
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to displayed in the speedometer similarly
the point of resistance, the desired speed to the mark for the desired speed.
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
Brief status display
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired Selected desired speed.
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
The maximum speed that can be set de‐ conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
pends on the vehicle. rently fulfilled.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
153
Displays in the Head-up Display WARNING

Some system information can also be dis‐ Due to high speeds when PDC is acti‐
played in the Head-up Display. vated, the warning can be delayed due to
physical circumstances. There is risk of injuries
or risk of property damage. Avoid approaching
PDC Park Distance Control an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while
PDC is not yet active.◀
The concept
PDC is a support when parking. When you Overview
slowly approach an object in the rear - or also
in the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa‐ With front PDC: button in vehicle
ble - then the object is reported through:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
General information
Ultrasound sensors in the bumpers measure
the distances from objects.
The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m. PDC Park Distance Control
An acoustic warning is first given with the fol‐
Ultrasound sensors
▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐
ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm. PDC sensors on the vehicle.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.

5 ft/1.50 m.
▷ When a collision is imminent.
Information Functional requirements

WARNING To ensure full functionality:
The system does not relieve from the ▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers,
personal responsibility to correctly assess the bicycle racks.
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
To clean: when using high-pressure washers,
do not spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
154
Switching on/off vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
speaker.
Switching on automatically The shorter the distance to the object, the
PDC switches on automatically in the following shorter the intervals.
situations: If the distance to a detected object is less than
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is
when the engine is running. sounded.
The rearview camera also switches on. With front PDC: if objects are located both in
▷ If equipped with front PDC: when obsta‐ front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating
cles are detected behind or in front of the continuous signal is sounded.
vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower The signal tone is switched off, when selector
than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. lever position P is engaged on vehicles with
You may turn off automatic activation: Steptronic transmission.
1. "Settings" Volume
2. "Parking" The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
3. Select setting. entertainment volume can be adjusted.
Settings are stored for the profile currently 1. "Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
used.
2. "Tone"
Automatic deactivation during forward 3. "Volume settings"

travel 4. "PDC"
The system switches off when a certain driving 5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
distance or speed is exceeded. is selected.
Switch the system back on if needed. 6. Press the controller.
With front PDC: switching on/off used.
manually
Press button. Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
▷ On: the LED lights up. be shown on the Control Display. Objects that
are farther away are already displayed on the
Control Display before a signal sounds.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the
Control (PDC) is activated.
button.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
Display colors green, yellow and red.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
Signal tones played, the switch can be made to PDC:
When approaching an object, an intermittent "Rear view camera"
sound indicates the position of the object. E. g.
if an object is detected to the left rear of the
155
System limits ▷ In large buildings with right angles and

smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐
Limits of ultrasonic measurement rages.
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under ▷ In automatic car washes.
the following circumstances: ▷ Through heavy pollution.
▷ For small children and animals. ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g. sweeping machines, high pressure steam
coats. cleaners or neon lights.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud Malfunction
machines. A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐ The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
aged or out of position. area on the Control Display.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other Surround View
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. The concept
Surround View comprises various camera as‐
▷ With moving objects.
sistance systems that help the driver when
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits
ledges or cargo. and intersections.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. ▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 156.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure ▷ Top View, refer to page 159.
such as fences.
▷ Side View, refer to page 161.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before Rearview camera
or after a continuous tone sounds.
The concept
False warnings The rearview camera provides assistance in
PDC may issue a warning under the following parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
conditions even though there is no obstacle behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
within the detection range: Display.
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered Information
with ice. WARNING
▷ When sensors are covered in snow. The system does not relieve from the
▷ On rough road surfaces. personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. There is risk of an accident.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
156
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings Automatic deactivation during forward
closely and actively interfere in the respective travel
situations.◀ The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Overview Switch the system back on if needed.
Button in the vehicle Switching on/off manually

Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.

The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
button.
Rearview camera
Switching the view via iDrive
With PDC activated or Top View switched on:
Camera "Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
Activating assistance functions

The camera lens is located in the handle of the
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tailgate. The image quality may be impaired by
tive at the same time.
dirt.
▷ Parking aid lines
Clean the camera lens, refer to page 257.
"Parking aid lines"
Switching on/off Lanes and turning radius are indicated.

▷ Obstacle marking
Switching on automatically "Obstacle marking"
With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐ Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
tion P R.
157
Pathway lines Obstacle marking
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐ Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by
age of the rearview camera. the PDC sensors and, when respectively
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space equipped, detected by the rearview camera.
required when parking and maneuvering on Obstacle markings can be faded into the image
level roads. of the rearview camera.
Pathway lines depend on the current steering Their colored margins of the obstacle mark‐
angle and are continuously adjusted to the ings match the markings of the PDC.
steering wheel movements.
Parking using pathway and turning
Turning circle lines radius lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐
dius lines lead to within the limits of the
parking space.
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed

on the rearview camera image together with
pathway lines.
Turning circle lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
158
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where Top View

the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning radius line. The concept
Top View provides assistance in parking and
maneuvering. The area around the vehicle is
shown on the Control Display.
General information
The image is captured by two cameras
integrated in the exterior mirrors, by the rear‐
view camera and a camera on the front of the
vehicle.
The range is no more than approx. 6.5 ft/2 m to
Display settings
the side, front and rear.
Brightness Obstacles within this range are thus displayed

early on the Control Display.
With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol. Information
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting WARNING
is reached, and press the controller.
Contrast traffic situation. There is risk of an accident.
With the rearview camera switched on: Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
1. Select the symbol.
closely and actively interfere in the respective
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting situations.◀
System limits Overview
Detection of objects Button in the vehicle

Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Assistance functions also take into account
data of the PDC.
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to
page 154.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
under certain circumstances are closer than
Top View
they appear. Do not estimate the distance from
the objects on the display.
159
Cameras The rearview camera image is displayed. To

switch to the Top View:
"Rear view camera"
Automatic deactivation during forward

travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
Front camera Switching on/off manually

Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.

Top View is displayed.
button.
The lenses of the Top View cameras are lo‐ Display

cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous‐
ings. The image quality may be impaired by Display on the Control Display
dirt.
The area surrounding the vehicle can be dis‐
Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 257. played on the Control Display.
The display appears as soon as Top View is
Functional requirements activated.
Top View can be used only to a limited extent When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
in the following situations: played, it is possible to switch to top view:
▷ With a door open. "Rear view camera"
▷ With the tailgate open.
Brightness
▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
With Top View switched on:
▷ In poor light.
The unavailable camera range is depicted by 1. Select the symbol.
shading. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
Switching on/off
Contrast
Switching on automatically With Top View switched on:
With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
tion P R.
160
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting Which camera is active is shown on the top
is reached, and press the controller. edge of the screen.
Displaying the turning radius and

Information
pathway lines
The images of the cameras are displayed, de‐
▷ The static, red turning radius line shows
pending on the gear selected, on the Control
the space needed to the side of the vehicle
Display.
when the steering wheel is turned all the
way. WARNING
▷ The variable, green pathway line assists The system does not relieve from the
you in assessing the amount of space ac‐ personal responsibility to correctly assess the
tually needed to the side of the vehicle. traffic situation. There is risk of an accident.
The lane line depends on the engaged Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
gear and the current steering angle. The tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
track line is continuously adjusted for the closely and actively interfere in the respective
steering wheel movement. situations.◀
"Parking aid lines"

Overview
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
System limits
A Check Control message is displayed when a
camera is not working.
Side View
The concept
Side View
Cameras
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic

at blind driveways and intersections. Road
users concealed by obstacles to the left and
right of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐
tively late from the driver's seat. To improve
the viewing, each camera, front and rear on the
vehicle, detects the traffic area on the side. Front camera
161
Contrast
With the Side View switched on:
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
Warning of crossing traffic
Rear camera The concept

Two cameras are used for the detection. When an object approaching from the side is
detected by the front or rear camera, this is de‐
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
picted by a symbol in the Side View display.
Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 257.
Requirements
Switching on/off ▷ Side View switched on.
▷ Your vehicle moves no faster than walking
Switching on/off manually speed.
Press button. ▷ To detect approaching objects, sufficient
brightness, e.g., daylight is necessary.
Depending on the transmission position, the
picture of the front or rear camera is displayed. Display
The yellow symbol is displayed if an
Switching off automatically approaching vehicle is detected by the
By switching into a different function or when camera.
changing gears.
Front Side View: when a certain driving dis‐ A gray symbol is displayed if crossing
tance or speed is exceeded. traffic cannot be detected.
Display System limits

In the following situations, the warning about
General information
crossing traffic may be limited:
The traffic area in front of or behind the vehicle
is displayed on the Control Display. ▷ In poor lighting or visibility conditions.
▷ If the camera is soiled or covered.
Brightness
With the Side View switched on: System limits
The objects displayed on the Control Display
1. Select the symbol. under certain circumstances are closer than
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting they appear. Therefore, do not estimate the
is reached, and press the controller. distance from the objects on the display.
The viewing angle is approx. 180°.
162
Parking assistant CAUTION

The parking assistant can steer the vehi‐
The concept cle over or onto curbs. There is risk of property
damage. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
terfere in the respective situations.◀
An engine that has been switched off by the

Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐
cally when the parking assistant is activated.
Overview

This system assists the driver in parking paral‐
lel to the road.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
on both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐
sible parking line and during the parking proce‐
dure takes control of steering, the acceleration
and braking and if needed changes the gears.
Hold down the parking assistant button for the
duration of the parking procedure. At the end Parking assistant
of the parking procedure, the P selector lever
position is set.
When parking, also take note of the visual and Ultrasound sensors
acoustic information and instructions issued
by the PDC, the parking assistant and the rear‐
view camera and react accordingly.
A component of the parking assistant is the
PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 154.
Information
WARNING
personal responsibility to correctly assess the The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ spaces are located on the side of the vehicle.
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic To ensure full functionality:
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
▷ Do not put stickers over sensors.
163
Requirements Display on the Control Display
For measuring parking spaces System activated/deactivated

▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h. Symbol Meaning
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐ Gray: the system is not available.
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m. White: the system is available but
not activated.
Suitable parking space
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum The system is activated.
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: System status
your vehicle's length plus approx.
4 ft/1.2 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Regarding the parking procedure

▷ Doors and tailgate closed.
▷ Parking brake released.
▷ Driver's safety belt fastened.
▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side

Switching on/off
of the vehicle illustrated. Parking assistant
is activated and search for parking space
Switching on with the button
active.
Press button. ▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
The LED lights up. spaces at the edge of the road next to the
vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant
The current status of the parking space search is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
is indicated on the Control Display. lighted.
Parking assistant is activated automatically. ▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has
Switching on with the reverse gear been taken over by system.
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display. ▷ Parking space search is always active
To activate: "Parking Assistant" whenever the vehicle is moving forward
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐
Switch off activated. When the system is deactivated,
the displays on the Control Display are
The system can be deactivated as follows:
shown in gray.
▷ Press button.
164
Parking using the parking assistant ▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts

or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
WARNING
▷ When switching to another function on the
Control Display.
traffic situation. There is risk of an accident. ▷ When the button is released.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐ ▷ If the tailgate is open.
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings ▷ If doors are open.
closely and actively interfere in the respective
situations.◀ ▷ When setting the parking brake.
▷ During acceleration.
1. Switch on the parking assistant and acti‐
vate it if needed. ▷ When braking.
The status of the parking space search is ▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt.
indicated on the Control Display. A Check Control message is displayed.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play. Resume
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐ An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
cated on the Control Display. tinued if needed.
3. Adjust the parking position yourself if Follow the instructions on the Control Display
needed. to do this.
Interrupting manually System limits

The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
No parking assistance
time:
The parking assistant does not offer assis‐
▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol tance in the following situations:
on the Control Display.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ Press button.
Interrupting automatically The system may not be fully functional in the
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations: ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if
he takes over steering. ▷ On slippery ground.
▷ Possible on snow-covered or slippery road ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.

surfaces. ▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to parking space.
overcome, such as curbs.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly
arise. Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances:
▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays
clearances that are too small. ▷ For small children and animals.
165
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.

coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before
or after a continuous tone sounds.
It can happen that parking spaces are detected
that are not suitable or suitable parking spaces
are not detected.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked.
166
Climate control Controls
Climate control
Automatic climate control
1 Air distribution, left 11 Air distribution, right

2 Temperature, left 12 Seat heating, right 54
3 AUTO program, left 13 Active seat ventilation, right 54
4 Air flow, AUTO intensity, left, residual heat 14 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
5 Remove ice and condensation lated-air mode
6 Maximum cooling 15 Cooling function
7 Display 16 Rear window defroster
8 Air flow, AUTO intensity, right 17 SYNC program
9 AUTO program, right 18 Active seat ventilation, left 54
10 Temperature, right 19 Seat heating, left 54
167
Controls Climate control
Climate control functions in detail The air will be cooled and dehumidified and,
depending on the temperature setting,
Switching the system on/off warmed again.
Switching on Depending on the weather, the windshield and

side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
Press any button except:
gine is started.
▷ Rear window defroster.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
▷ Left side of Air volume button. cally with the AUTO program.
▷ Seat heating. When using the automatic climate control,
▷ Seat ventilation. condensation water, refer to page 195, devel‐
▷ If necessary, SYNC program. ops that exits underneath the vehicle.
Switch off Maximum cooling

▷ Complete system: Press button.
Press and hold the left button on The system is set to the lowest tem‐
the driver's side until the control perature, optimum air flow and air circulation
clicks off. mode.
▷ On the front passenger side: Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
Press and hold the left button on gion. The vents need to be open for this.
the front passenger side. The function is available above an external
temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
Temperature engine running is indicated.
Turn the ring to set the desired Adjust air flow with the program active.
temperature.
AUTO program
Press button.
Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐
The automatic climate control achieves this
ture are controlled automatically.
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed
by using the maximum cooling or heating ca‐ Depending on the selected temperature,
pacity, and then keeps it constant. AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ ces, the air is directed to the windshield, side
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ windows, upper body, and into the footwell.
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ The cooling function, refer to page 168, is
just the set temperature. switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
Cooling function
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
The car's interior can only be cooled with the trols the program so as to prevent window
engine running. condensation as much as possible.
Press button.
168
Intensity of the AUTO program The air flow of the automatic climate control
With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐ may be reduced automatically to save battery
matic intensity control can be changed. power.
Press the left or right side of the but‐ Manual air distribution
ton: decrease or increase the inten‐
sity. Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control. ▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and footwell.
Automatic recirculated-air control/ ▷ Footwell.
recirculated-air mode
▷ Windows and footwell.
You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
▷ Windows, upper body region, and footwell.
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The ▷ Windows: driver's side only.
system then recirculates the air currently ▷ Windows and upper body region.
within the vehicle. If the windows are fogged over, press the
Press button repeatedly to select an AUTO button on the driver's side to utilize the
operating mode: condensation sensor.
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. SYNC program

▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air The current settings on the driver's
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the side for temperature, air flow, air distri‐
outside air and shuts off automatically. bution, and AUTO program are transferred to
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the the front passenger side and to the left and
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐ right rear.
manently blocked. The program is switched off if the settings on
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air the front passenger side or in the rear are
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the changed.
fogging of the windows increases.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the Residual heat
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO
The heat stored in the engine is used to heat
button on the driver's side to utilize the con‐
the interior.
densation sensor. Make sure that air can flow
to the windshield.
Functional requirement
Air flow, manual ▷ Up to 15 minutes after switching off the
engine.
To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
gram first. ▷ Warm engine.
Press the left or right side of the but‐ ▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.
ton: decrease or increase air flow. ▷ External temperature below 77 ℉/25 ℃.
The availability of the function is shown on the
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
display of the automatic climate control.
the automatic climate control.
169
Switching on The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous

1. Switch off the ignition. pollutants from the outside air that enters the
vehicle.
2. Press the right side of the button This combined filter should be replaced during
on the driver's side. scheduled maintenance, refer to page 238, of
The symbol appears on the automatic cli‐ your vehicle.
mate Control Display.
The interior temperature, air volume and air
distribution can be adjusted with the ignition
Ventilation
switched on.
Front ventilation
Switch off
At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of
the button on the driver's side.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes.
Defrosts windows and removes

condensation
Press button. ▷ Thumbwheels to vary the temperature in
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐ the upper body region, arrow 1.
moved from the windshield and the front side Toward blue: colder.
windows.
Toward red: warmer.
For this purpose, point the side vents onto the
side windows as needed. The set interior temperature for the driver
and passenger are not changed.
Adjust air flow with the program active. ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
If the windows are fogged over, you can also arrow 2.
switch on the cooling function or press the ▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐ vents continuously, arrows 3.
sor.
Rear window defroster Adjusting the ventilation

▷ Ventilation for cooling:
Press button.
Direct vent in your direction when vehicle's
The rear window defroster switches
interior is too hot.
off automatically after a certain period of time.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air.
170
Ventilation in rear, center
▷ Button for switching on the fan, arrow 1.

LED comes on.
▷ Thumbwheels to vary the temperature, ar‐
row 1. ▷ Thumbwheel for the activation of the heat
and distribution of the air, arrow 2.
Toward blue: colder.
Turn toward the front: activate the heater
Toward red: warmer.
and distribute the air in the footwell.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
Turn toward the rear: distribute the air in
arrow 2.
the storage area between the seats.
▷ Thumbwheels for continuous opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 3. The heater is not ready for operation without
switching on the fan. After the heater is
switched off, the fan can be used to circulate
Ventilation, side the interior air, e.g., at high temperatures. To
do this, switch on the fan, arrow 1, and turn the
thumbwheel toward the rear, arrow 2.
Rear automatic climate

control
Overview
▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and

closing of the vents, arrow 1.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 2.
Heating and ventilation, third row of

seats
The air in the area of the third row of seats can
be heated or circulated. The vents are located 1 Temperature
in the storage area between the seats and in 2 AUTO program
the footwell of the third row of seats. 3 Vent settings
4 Air flow, AUTO intensity
171
5 Display Maximum cooling

6 Maximum cooling Press button.
7 Seat heating 56 The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, maximum air flow and air circulation
mode.
Switching the rear automatic climate
control on/off Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
1. "Settings" gion. The vents need to be open for this.
2. "Climate" Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
3. "Rear climate" ▷ At an external temperature of approx.
The rear automatic climate control is not op‐ 32 ℉/0 ℃.
erational if the automatic climate control is ▷ When the engine is running.
switched off or if the function for defrosting or
defogging the windows is active. AUTO program
Press button.
Switching the system on/off
Air flow, air distribution, and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically:
Switching on
Press any button except: Depending on the selected temperature, the
▷ Left side of Air volume button. AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air
is directed to the upper body and into the foot‐
▷ Seat heating.
well.
Switch off The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
Press and hold the left button.
Intensity of the AUTO program
Temperature With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐
matic intensity control can be changed:
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature. Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase the inten‐
sity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display

The automatic climate control achieves this of the automatic climate control.
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed
by using the maximum cooling or heating ca‐ Air flow, manual
pacity, and then keeps it constant.
To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ gram first.
perature settings. The automatic climate con‐
trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the Press the left or right side of the but‐
set temperature. ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of

the automatic climate control.
172
Manual air distribution The system continues to run for some time af‐
The air distribution can be adjusted to individ‐ ter being switched off.
ual needs.
Setting departure time
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
1. "Settings"
▷ Upper body region.
2. "Climate"
▷ Upper body region and footwell.
3. Select the departure time.
▷ Footwell.
Turn the controller until the desired depar‐
ture time field has been selected and press
Controller.
Parked-car ventilation
4. Set the time.
The concept Turn the controller until the desired time is
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐ set and press the controller.
cle interior and lowers its temperature, if
needed. Activating the departure time
The system can be switched on and off di‐ On the Control Display:
rectly or by using two preset departure times. 1. "Settings"
The reel-on time is automatically determined 2. "Climate"
based on the temperature. The system
3. Activating the desired departure time:
promptly switches on before the selected de‐
parture time. "for departure at"
Operation can be performed via iDrive. The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol lights up when the departure time is acti‐
Functional requirements vated.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
Parked-car ventilation trol flashes when the system has been
▷ When the departure time is preselected: switched on.
depends on internal, external and set tem‐ The system will only be switched on within the
perature. next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
▷ Direct operation: any external temperature. vated.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate now"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
173
Controls Interior equipment
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options Compatibility
This chapter describes all standard, country- If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
specific and optional features offered with the ing or in the instructions of the system
series. It also describes features that are not to be controlled, the system is gener‐
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to ally compatible with the universal garage door
the selected options or country versions. This opener.
also applies to safety-related functions and If you have any questions, please contact:
systems. The respectively applicable country ▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
provisions must be observed when using the fied service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex

Universal Integrated Remote Corporation.
Control
Controls on the interior rearview
The concept mirror
The universal garage door opener can operate
up to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐
tems such as garage door drives or lighting
systems. The universal garage door opener re‐
places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters.
To operate the remote control, the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror must be program‐
med with the desired functions. The hand-held
transmitter for the particular system is required
in order to program the remote control.
▷ LED, arrow 1.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
functions for the sake of security.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
Information quired for programming.
WARNING
Programming
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g. the garage
General information
door, using the universal garage door opener.
There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐ 1. Switch on the ignition.
age. Make sure that the area of movement of 2. Initial setup:
the respective system is clear during program‐ Press and hold the left and right button on
ming and operation. Also follow the safety in‐ the interior rearview mirror simultaneously
structions of the hand-held transmitter.◀ for approximately 20 seconds until the LED
on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This
174
Interior equipment Controls
erases all programming of the buttons on rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then
the interior rearview mirror. stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐ features an alternating-code system. Flashing
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐
8 cm away from the buttons of the interior peat for approximately 20 seconds.
rearview mirror. The required distance de‐ For systems with an alternating-code system,
pends on the manual transmitter. the universal garage door opener and the sys‐
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button tem also have to be synchronized.
of the desired function on the hand-held Please read the operating manual to find out
transmitter and the button to be program‐ how to synchronize the system.
med on the interior rearview mirror. The Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐ ond person.
gin flashing slowly.
To synchronize:
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
faster indicates that the button on the inte‐ mote-controlled system.
rior rearview mirror has been programmed. 2. Program the relevant button on the interior
If the LED does not flash faster after at rearview mirror as described.
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐ 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
tween the interior rearview mirror and the on the system being programmed. You
hand-held transmitter and repeat the step. have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
Several more attempts at different distan‐ 4. Hold down the programmed button on the
ces may be necessary. Wait at least interior rearview mirror for approximately
15 seconds between attempts. 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary,
Canada: if programming with the hand- repeat this step up to three times in order
held transmitter was interrupted, hold to finish synchronization. Once synchroni‐
down the interior rearview mirror button zation is complete, the programmed func‐
and repeatedly press and release the tion will be carried out.
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds. Reprogramming individual buttons
6. To program other functions on other but‐ 1. Switch on the ignition.
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. 2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐ button to be programmed.
rior rearview mirror buttons. 3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED
starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held
Special feature of the alternating- transmitter for the system to be controlled
code wireless system approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the
If you are unable to operate the system after buttons of the interior rearview mirror. The
repeated programming, please check if the required distance depends on the manual
system to be controlled features an alternat‐ transmitter.
ing-code system.
Read the system's operating manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior rear‐
view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior
175
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes
desired function on the hand-held trans‐ rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The
mitter. functions cannot be deleted individually.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐
rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐
idly. The LED flashing faster indicates that Sun visor
the button on the interior rearview mirror
has been programmed. The system can Glare shield
then be controlled by the button on the in‐ Fold the sun visor down or up.
terior rearview mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at Glare shield from the side
least 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step. Several more attempts at Folding out
different distances may be necessary. Wait 1. Fold the sun visor down.
at least 15 seconds between attempts.
2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to
Canada: if programming with the hand- the side.
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
3. Move it back to the desired position.
down the interior rearview mirror button
and repeatedly press and release the
Folding up
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds. Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun
visor.
Controls
Vanity mirror
WARNING
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐ hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g. the garage mirror lighting switches on.
door, using the universal garage door opener.
There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐
age. Make sure that the area of movement of
Ashtray
the respective system is clear during program‐
ming and operation. Also follow the safety in‐
Front
structions of the hand-held transmitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be Opening

operated using the button on the interior rear‐
view mirror while the engine is running or when
the ignition is started. To do this, hold down
the button within receiving range of the system
until the function is activated. The interior rear‐
view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐
nal is being transmitted.
Deleting stored functions

Press and hold the left and right button on the Slide the cover forward.
interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐
176
Emptying Front
Take out the insert.
Overview
Rear
Opening
The lighter is located next to the ashtray.
Controls
Press on the cover.
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as
Emptying soon as it pops back out.
Take out the insert.
Lighter Rear
Information Overview
WARNING
Contact with hot heating elements or the
hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause
burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the
cigarette lighter falls down or is held against
the respective objects. There is risk of fire and
injuries. Hold the cigarette lighter on its handle.
Make sure that children do not use the ciga‐
rette lighter and do not burn themselves, e.g.
by carrying the remote control along when ex‐ The cigarette lighter is located in the rear cen‐
iting the vehicle.◀ ter console.
CAUTION
Controls
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is risk of prop‐ Push in the lighter.
erty damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or The lighter can be removed as
socket cover again after using the socket.◀ soon as it pops back out.
177
Connecting electrical Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

devices
Center armrest
Information
CAUTION
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12V on-board network
can be overloaded or damaged. There is risk of
property damage. Only connect battery charg‐
ers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid
terminals in the engine compartment.◀
Remove the cover.
CAUTION
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is risk of prop‐
Rear center console
erty damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Sockets
General information
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
ning or when the ignition is switched on.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
Information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed In the trunk
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Front center console
Fold open the cover.
Slide the cover forward.
178
USB interface for data Rear cooler

transfer
Information
The concept WARNING
Connection for importing and exporting data The cover of the opened cooler pro‐
on USB devices, e.g.: trudes into the car's interior. Injuries can occur
▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 35. in the event of an accident, braking or evasive
▷ Music collection, see user's manual for maneuver. The content of the cooler can be
Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐ thrown into the car's interior and injure occu‐
cation. pants. There is risk of injuries. Close the cooler
after use when driving.◀
Information
Observe the following when connecting: Folding down the middle section
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lights to the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB interface for recharg‐
ing external devices.
With navigation system Professional Reach into the recess and pull forward.
or TV: at a glance
Opening
The USB interface is located in the center arm‐

rest.
Pull on the opener and fold the cooler forward.
Switching on
The cooler can be operated at two levels.
2. Press button once for each cooling

level.
179
The highest cooling power is active when Installing

two LEDs are lit. 1. Fold the release levers with an angle of ap‐
If the cooler was switched on the last time the prox. 45° and push the cooler forward onto
ignition was switched on, it will likewise be the contact up to the stop.
switched on the next time the ignition is
switched on.
Switch off
Press button repeatedly until the LEDs go out.
Removing
1. Pull handles on both sides, arrows.
2. Fold both release levers down.

3. Pull handles, arrows 1, and press the re‐
lease levers, arrows 2, into the rails, until
they latch.
2. Fold both release levers up.
Malfunction
The cooler cannot be switched on or switches
off, e.g., when the cooling system overheats or
if the battery voltage is low. One of the LEDs
3. Pull cooler downward and remove it. flashes.
Remedy the problem

1. If necessary, allow the refrigerator cooling
system to cool down.
2. Start the engine.
3. Switch on cooler.
If the LED flashes even after a short time, have
the cooler checked by a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
180
Cargo area
Cargo cover
Information
CAUTION
A cargo cover hooked in incorrectly can
cause damage. There is risk of property dam‐
age. Hook the cargo cover on both sides.◀ 1. Press button, arrow 1, to unlock the cover.
WARNING 2. Pull the cover back, arrow 2.
Loose objects in the car's interior can be
thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g. Installing
in the event of an accident or during braking Slide the cover forward horizontally into the
and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of inju‐ two side brackets until it audibly latches. The
ries. Secure loose objects in the car's inte‐ red warning fields disappear. Tug on the cover
rior.◀ to check if it is properly locked in place.
WARNING Enlarging the trunk

A cargo cover that snaps back quickly
can jam body parts or cause damage. There is General information
risk of injuries or risk of property damage. Do The trunk can be enlarged by folding down the
not let the cargo cover snap back into place.◀ rear seat backrest.
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of
Attaching 40–20–40. The sides and the middle section
can be folded down separately.
Information
WARNING
Danger of jamming with folding down the
backrests. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the rear backrest is clear prior to
folding down.◀
1. Remove cargo cover, arrow 1.
WARNING
2. Hook cargo cover into the brackets on both
sides, arrows 2. The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
Removing adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
The cover can be removed to load bulky lug‐
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
gage.
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
181
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If Folding down the middle section
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
WARNING
With an unlocked backrest, an unsecured
load can be thrown into the car's interior, e.g.
in case of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
neuver. There is risk of injuries. Make sure that
the backrest engages into the locking after
folding it back.◀
Reach into the recess and pull forward.
WARNING
With a rear backrest that is not locked, Folding back the backrest
the protective function of the middle safety
1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
belt is not guaranteed. There is risk of injuries
or danger to life. If you are using the middle
safety belt, lock the wider rear backrest.◀
Folding down the sides

CAUTION
Screens in the rear can be damaged
when folding down the rear backrest. There is
risk of property damage. Make sure that the
area of movement is clear prior to folding down
2. Fold up backrest, arrow 2.
the rear backrest.◀
Ski and snowboard bag

General information
The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a
protective jacket in the trunk.
Follow the installation and operation instruc‐
tions included in the protective jacket.
Reach into the recess and pull forward.
182
Storage compartments Controls
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options ▷ Storage compartment third row of seats,
refer to page 184
▷ Center armrest, refer to page 185.
series. It also describes features that are not ▷ Glasses compartment, refer to page 186.
also applies to safety-related functions and Glove compartment
provisions must be observed when using the Front passenger side
Information
WARNING
Information Folded open, the glove compartment
WARNING protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
Loose objects in the car's interior can be glove compartment can be thrown into the
thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g. car's interior while driving, e.g. in the event of
in the event of an accident or during braking an accident or during braking and evasive ma‐
and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of inju‐ neuvers. There is risk of injuries. Always close
ries. Secure loose objects in the car's inte‐ the glove compartment immediately after us‐
rior.◀ ing it.◀
CAUTION Opening
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
Pull the handle.
side, refer to page 183.
The light in the glove compartment switches
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side,
on.
refer to page 184.
The retaining strap in the glove compartment
▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
is used to store small objects.
page 184.
▷ Storage compartment on the center con‐
sole, refer to page 184. Closing
Fold cover closed.
183
Controls Storage compartments
Locking risk of injuries. Do not stow any breakable ob‐

The glove compartment can be locked with an jects in the car's interior.◀
integrated key. This prevents access to the
glove compartment.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐ Storage compartment on the
mote control can be handed over, such as at a center console
hotel, without the integrated key.
Opening
Driver's side
Information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
glove compartment can be thrown into the
car's interior while driving, e.g. in the event of
an accident or during braking and evasive ma‐
neuvers. There is risk of injuries. Always close Slide the cover forward.
the glove compartment immediately after us‐
ing it.◀
Closing
Slide the cover rearward.
Opening
Small storage compartment
Pull the handle.
Storage possibility for small objects, e.g.,

Closing coins.
Fold cover closed.
Storage compartment third

Compartments in the doors
row of seats
WARNING
Breakable object, e.g. glass bottle, can Overview
break in the event of an accident. Broken glass A storage compartment is located between the
can be scattered in the car's interior. There is seats of third row of seats.
184
Connection for an external audio

device
An external audio device, e.g.,
an MP3 player, can be con‐
nected via the AUX-IN port or
the USB audio interface in the
center armrest.
Rear
Center armrest Overview

A storage compartment is located in the center
Front armrest between the seats.
Overview Opening
Located in the center armrest between the 1. Pull the loop and fold down the center arm‐
front seats is a storage compartment and de‐ rest.
pending on how the vehicle is equipped also
an elastic band on the left side and a cover for
the snap-in adapter.
Opening
2. Pull the handle.
Push the cover down slightly and press the

button, see arrow. The respective cover folds
up.
Closing
Fold the respective cover down until it latches.
Closing
Press cover down until it latches.
185
Glasses compartment
Overview
The compartment for eye glasses is located
between the interior mirror and interior lights.
Opening
Slide the cover forward.
Press button.
Closing
Two cupholders are located in the center con‐
Press the cover up until it latches.
sole.
Cupholders Rear
Information Information
WARNING CAUTION
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder With an open cup holder, the center arm‐
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder rest cannot be folded back up. There is risk of
and increase the risk of injuries in the event of property damage. Press back the covers be‐
an accident. There is risk of injuries or risk of fore the center armrest is folded up.◀
property damage. Use light-weight, unbreaka‐
ble, and sealable containers. Do not transport Overview
hot beverages. Do not force objects into the In the center armrest.
cup holder.◀
Front
Overview
In the center console.
186
Opening Clothes hooks

1. Pull the loop and fold down the center arm‐
WARNING
rest.
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks
can obstruct the view while driving. There is
risk of an accident. When suspending clothing
articles from the hooks, ensure that they will
not obstruct the driver's view.◀
WARNING
Improper use of the clothes hooks can
lead to a danger of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is risk
2. Press button. of injuries and risk of property damage. Only
hang lightweight objects, e.g. clothing articles,
from the clothes hooks.◀
The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐

dles in the rear.
Storage compartments in the

trunk
Storage space under cargo floor panel
Closing
Press both covers inward back against each
other.
Third row of seats
Overview
The cupholders are located between the seats
of the third row of seats.
Fold up the cargo floor panel. The storage

space under the cargo floor panel is subdi‐
vided.
Multi-function hook
WARNING
Improper use of the multifunction hooks
can lead to a danger of objects flying about
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There
is risk of injuries and risk of property damage.
187
Only hang lightweight objects, e.g. shopping Lashing eyes in the cargo area
bags, from the multifunction hooks. Only To secure the cargo, refer to page 197, there
transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it has are lashing eyes in the cargo area.
been appropriately secured.◀
Lashing eyes in the trunk with rail
To secure the cargo, refer to page 197, there
are lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Cargo net, FlexNet

To secure the cargo, refer to page 197, the
flexible cargo net can also be used.
Depending on the installed equipment version,

there are one or two multi-function hooks in
the cargo area.
Retaining strap
A retaining strap is available on the left side
trim for fastening small objects.
Net
Smaller objects can be stored in the net on the
left side of the trunk.
Storage compartment on the right

side
A waterproof storage compartment is available
on the right side of the trunk.
Left side storage compartment
Pull the handle.
188
189
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.

Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
the selected options or country versions. This Drive conservatively for the first
also applies to safety-related functions and 200 miles/300 km.
provisions must be observed when using the Brake system
respective features and systems. Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimal per‐
formance between brake discs and brake
Breaking-in period pads. Drive moderately during this break-in pe‐
riod.
General information
Moving parts need time to adjust to one an‐ Following part replacement
other (break-in time). The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
The following instructions will help accomplish served if any of the components above-men‐
a long vehicle life and good efficiency. tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐
trol, refer to page 83.
Engine, transmission, and axle drive

General driving notes
Closing the tailgate
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road WARNING
speed: An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and cle and can endanger occupants and other
100 mph/160 km/h. traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
▷ For diesel engine 3,500 rpm and
neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter
93 mph/150 km/h.
the vehicle interior. There is risk of injuries or
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐ risk of property damage. Do not drive with the
stances. tailgate open.◀
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km If driving with the tailgate open cannot be

avoided:
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased. ▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ Drive moderately.
192
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
Hot exhaust system Use this area for garage door openers, devices
for electronic toll collection, etc.
WARNING
During driving operation, high tempera‐
tures can occur underneath the body, e.g. Mobile communication devices in the
caused by the exhaust gas system. If combus‐ vehicle
tible materials, such as leaves or grass, come WARNING
in contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones
system, these materials can ignite. There is
can influence one another. There is radiation
risk of injuries or risk of property damage.
due to the send operations of mobile phones.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure age. If possible, in the car's interior use only
that no combustible materials can come in mobile phones with direct connections to an
contact with hot vehicle parts in driving opera‐ exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual
tion, idle or during parking. Do not touch the disturbance and deflect the radiation from the
hot exhaust system.◀ car's interior.◀
Diesel particulate filter Hydroplaning

The diesel particulate filter collects soot parti‐ On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
cles and burns them periodically at high tem‐ form between the tires and road surface.
peratures.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
During several minutes of cleaning the follow‐ ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
ing may occur: loss of contact between the tires and the road
▷ Temporarily, the engine may run less surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
smoothly. steer and brake the vehicle.
▷ Noises and a slight amount of smoke com‐
ing from the exhaust until shortly after the Driving through water
engine is shut down. CAUTION
▷ A somewhat higher engine speed is neces‐ When driving too quickly through too
sary to reach usual performance. deep water, water can enter into the engine
compartment, the electrical system or the
Climate control windshield transmission. There is risk of property damage.
When driving through water, do not exceed the
maximum indicated water level and the maxi‐
mum speed for driving through water.◀
Drive though calm water only and only if it is

not deeper than 19.6 inches/50 cm and at this
height, no faster than walking speed, up to
3 mph/5 km/h.
Braking safely
The marked area is not covered with heat re‐ Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
flective coating. ard feature.
193
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective Hills

way of braking in situations needed.
WARNING
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
Light but consistent brake pressure can
any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out
fort.
and possibly even brake failure. There is risk of
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on
the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its the brake system.◀
active mode.
In certain braking situations, the perforated WARNING
brake discs can cause functional problems. In idle or with the engine switched off,
However, this has no effect on the perform‐ safety-relevant functions are restricted or not
ance and operational reliability of the brake. available anymore, e.g. braking effect of the
engine or braking force and steering support.
Objects in the movement area around There is risk of an accident. Do not drive in idle
pedals and floor area or with the engine switched off.◀
WARNING Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit gear that requires least braking efforts. Other‐
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. wise the brakes may overheat and reduce
There is risk of an accident. Stow objects in brake efficiency.
the vehicle such that they are secured and You can increase the engine's braking effect
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and if needed.
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor Brake disc corrosion
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐ Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats tion on the brake pads are furthered by the fol‐
are securely fastened again after they were re‐ lowing circumstances:
moved, e.g. for cleaning.◀
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
Driving in wet conditions
used at all.
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain,
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
press brake pedal ever so gently every few
miles. Corrosion will built up when the maximum
pressure applied to the brake pads during
Ensure that this action does not endanger
braking is not reached - thus discs don't get
other traffic.
cleaned.
The heat generated in this process helps dry
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
the brake discs and pads.
a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
In this way braking efficiency will be available sponse - generally that cannot be corrected.
when you need it.
194
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
Condensation under the parked systems can distribute the driving force to
vehicle the wheels. Activate DTC Dynamic Trac‐
When using the automatic climate control, tion Control if available.
condensation water develops collecting under‐
neath the vehicle. After a trip on poor roads
These traces of water under the vehicle are After a trip on poor roads, check wheels and
normal. tires for damage to maintain driving safety.
Clear heavy soiling from the body.
Driving on poor roads

The vehicle combines all-wheel drive with the
advantages of a normal automobile.
CAUTION
Objects in unpaved areas, e.g. stones or
branches, can damage the vehicle. There is
risk of property damage. Do not drive on un‐
paved terrain.◀
For your own safety, for the safety of passen‐

gers and of the vehicle, heed the following
points:
▷ Become familiar with the vehicle before
starting a trip; do not take risks in driving.
▷ Adjust the speed to the road surface con‐
ditions. The steeper and more uneven the
road surface, the slower the speed should
be.
▷ When driving on steep uphill or downhill
grades: add engine oil and coolant up to
near the MAX mark. Uphill and downhill
grades can be traveled up to no more than
50 %.
▷ On steep downhill grades, use Hill Descent
Control HDC, refer to page 140.
Starting out is possible on uphill grades up
to 32 %. The permissible side tilt is 50 %.
▷ Avoid that the chassis bottom coming in
contact with the ground.
The ground clearance is no more than 7.8
inches/20 cm and can vary according to
the vehicle's load.
▷ When wheels continue to spin, depress the
accelerator so that driving stability control
195
Driving tips Loading
Loading
Vehicle features and options or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the
vehicle and unstable driving situations
This chapter describes all standard, country- may result.
Information 2. Determine the combined weight of the

driver and passengers that will be riding in
WARNING your vehicle.
High gross weight can overheat the tires, 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
damage them internally, and cause a sudden and passengers from XXX kilograms or
drop in tire inflation pressure. There is risk of YYY pounds.
an accident. Pay attention to the permitted
load capacity of the tires and never exceed the 4. The resulting figure equals the available
permitted gross weight.◀ amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity.
CAUTION For example, if the YYY amount equals
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐ 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs
age. There is risk of property damage. Make passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.◀ available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =
WARNING 400 lbs.
Loose objects in the car's interior can be 5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g. gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
in the event of an accident or during braking cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of inju‐ available cargo and luggage load capacity
ries. Secure loose objects in the car's inte‐ calculated in Step 4.
rior.◀
Determining the load limit

1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard:
▷ The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed XXX kg
196
Loading Driving tips
Load ▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of

the backrests.
Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of

the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
To secure the cargo there are four lashing

eyes in the cargo area.
Lashing eyes in the trunk with rails
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of

the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
To secure the cargo there are four movable

Stowing cargo lashing eyes in the cargo area.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the

cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo. To slide the lashing eyes, press the button, ar‐
row 1. Make sure that the lashing eyes latch at
the new position.
197
Driving tips Loading
The lashing eyes at the openings in the rails Roof-mounted luggage rack
can be removed.
Information
Cargo net, FlexNet Installation only possible with roof rack.
The flexible cargo net is hooked into eyes and Roof racks are available as special accessories.
offers a stowage option in the cargo area. The
storage net can be attached to the following Securing
eyes: Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Loading
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center
of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐
fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐
sponse.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
▷ Lashing eyes in the rails. ▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
▷ Eyes on the trunk wall. loads and the approved gross vehicle
The eyes are located on both sides of the weight.
trunk. ▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass
Securing cargo sunroof.
WARNING ▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
Improperly stowed objects can shift and ▷ The roof load should not extend past the
be thrown into the car's interior, e.g. in the loading area.
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐ ▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit bottom.
and injured. There is risk of injuries. Stow and
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie
secure objects and cargo properly.◀
with ratchet straps.
▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐ ▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
taining straps or with a cargo net or draw path of the tailgate.
straps.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
cargo straps. gently.
Cargo straps, cargo netting, retaining
straps or draw straps on the lashing eyes in
the trunk.
198
Saving fuel Driving tips
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options Close the windows and glass
This chapter describes all standard, country- sunroof
specific and optional features offered with the Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
series. It also describes features that are not open results in increased air resistance and
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to thereby reduces the range.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐
General information sumption.
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐ Check the tire inflation pressure
sions. regularly
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
ferent factors. pressure at least twice a month and before
Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐ starting on a long trip.
erate driving style and regular maintenance, Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
ronmental impact. tire wear.
Remove unnecessary cargo Drive away immediately

Additional weight increases fuel consumption. Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Remove attached parts This is the quickest way of warming the cold
following use engine up to operating temperature.
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage

racks which are no longer required following
use.
Look well ahead when
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
driving
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption. Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.
199
Driving tips Saving fuel
Avoid high engine speeds reduce the range, especially in city and stop-
and-go traffic.
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
Switch off these functions if they are not
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
needed.
If necessary, observe the gear shift indicator of
The ECO PRO driving program supports the
the vehicle, refer to page 96.
energy conserving use of comfort features.
These functions are automatically deactivated
partially or completely.
Use coasting
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to Have maintenance carried
a halt. out
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
erator and let the vehicle roll.
optimal vehicle efficiency and service life.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting. BMW recommends that maintenance work be
performed by a BMW dealer’s service center.
For information on the BMW Maintenance
Switch off the engine during System, refer to page 238.
longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic ECO PRO
congestion.
The concept
Auto Start/Stop function ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
automatically switches off the engine during a gine control and comfort features, e. g. the cli‐
stop. mate control output, are adjusted.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐
rather than leaving the engine running con‐ matically decoupled from the transmission in
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are the D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐ tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐
onds of switching off the engine. duce fuel consumption. Selector lever position
D remains engaged.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐
mined by other factors, such as driving style, In addition, context-sensitive instructions are
road conditions, maintenance or environmental displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐
factors. sumption driving style.
The achieved extended range is displayed in
the instrument cluster as bonus range.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed Overview
The system includes the following
Functions such as seat heating and the rear EfficientDynamics functions and displays:
window defroster require a lot of energy and
▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 201.
200
▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to This function is only available in ECO PRO
page 202 mode.
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to
page 201. ECO PRO climate control
▷ ECO PRO coasting driving status, refer to "ECO PRO climate control"
page 203. Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.
By making a slight change to the set tempera‐
Activate ECO PRO ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or
Press button repeatedly until ECO cooling of the car's interior, fuel consumption
PRO is displayed in the instrument can be economized.
cluster. The mirror heating is made available when out‐
side temperatures are very cold.
Configuring ECO PRO
ECO PRO potential
Via the Driving Dynamics Control Shows potential savings with the current set‐
1. Activate ECO PRO. tings in percentages.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"

3. Configure the program.
Display in the instrument display
Via the iDrive When ECO PRO mode is activated, the display
1. "Settings" switches to a special configuration.
2. "ECO PRO mode" Some of the displays may differ from the dis‐
or play in the instrument cluster.
Blue bar segments symbolize the gained bo‐
1. "Settings"
nus range in stages.
2. "Driving mode"
In addition, the bonus range is highlighted in
3. "Configure ECO PRO" blue in the total range display.
Configure the program.
ECO PRO bonus range
ECO PRO Tip An adjusted driving style helps
▷ "Tip at:": you extend your driving range.
Adjust the ECO PRO speed. This may be displayed as the
▷ "ECO PRO speed warning": bonus range in the instrument
The output is reduced once the set ECO cluster.
PRO speed is reached. The bonus range is shown in the range display.
The bonus range is automatically reset every
Coasting time the vehicle is refueled.
Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐
ing the engine and Coasting, refer to
page 203, with the engine idling.
201
Efficiency display efficient by backing off the accelerator for in‐

stance.
Information
The efficiency display and ECO PRO tips in the
instrument cluster appear when the ECO PRO
display is activated.
Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips:
1. "Settings"
3. "ECO PRO Info"
Display in the instrument display In the instrument display:
1. "Settings"
3. "Driving mode view"
ECO PRO tip, symbols

An additional symbol and text instructions are
displayed.
Symbol Measure
A mark in the efficiency display informs about For efficient driving back off the ac‐
the current driving style. celerator or delay accelerating to al‐
Mark in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐ low time to assess road conditions.
ergy recovered by coasting or when braking. Reduce speed to the selected ECO
Mark in the area of arrow 2: display when ac‐ PRO speed.
celerating.
Your driving style's efficiency is shown by the Steptronic transmission: shift from
bar's color: M/S to D.
▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long
as the mark moves within the blue range.
Indications on the Control Display
▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by
backing off the accelerator pedal. EfficientDynamics
The display switches to blue as soon as all Information on fuel consumption and technol‐
conditions for fuel-efficiency-optimized driving ogy can be displayed while driving.
are met.
1. "Vehicle info"
ECO PRO tip, driving tip 2. "EfficientDynamics"
The arrow indicates that the driving
Displaying EfficientDynamics info
style can be adjusted to be more fuel
The current efficiency can be displayed.
202
"EfficientDynamics info" Safety mode

The following systems are displayed: The function is not available under one of the
▷ Auto Start/Stop function. following conditions.
▷ Energy recovery. ▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
▷ Climate control output. ▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on

steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ Coasting.
▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low
Display ECO PRO tips or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐
sive current.
"ECO PRO tips"
▷ Cruise control activated.
used.
Coasting In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in
a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐
The concept prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if
the following conditions are met:
The system helps to conserve fuel.
▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not
To do this, under certain conditions the engine
operated.
is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐
sion when selector lever position D is set. The ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
vehicle continues traveling with the engine tion D.
idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector ▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
lever position D remains engaged. temperature.
This driving condition is referred to as coast‐ The driving status Coast can be influenced
ing. with the shift paddles.
As soon as you step on the brake or accelera‐
tor pedal, the engine is automatically coupled Display
again.
Information The mark in the efficiency dis‐
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re‐ play below the tachometer is
fer to page 200, driving mode. backlit in blue and is located at
the zero point. The tachometer
Coasting is automatically activated when ECO
approximately indicates idle
PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
speed.
Control.
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at
The function is available in a certain speed
the zero point during coasting.
range.
A proactively driving style helps the driver to Display in the instrument display
use the function as often as possible and sup‐
The mark in the efficiency dis‐
ports the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.
play is backlit in blue and is lo‐
cated at the zero point.
203
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at

the zero point during coasting.
Indications on the Control Display

The Coasting driving condition is displayed in
EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode
is active.
Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2:

driving condition Coasting.
Displaying EfficientDynamics info

1. "Vehicle info"
2. "EfficientDynamics"
3. "EfficientDynamics info"
Deactivating the system manually

The function can be deactivated in the Config‐
ure ECO PRO, refer to page 201, menu, e.g., to
use the braking effect of the engine when trav‐
eling downhill.
used.
204
205
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.

Mobility Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle features and options Fuel lid
Opening
series. It also describes features that are not 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to flap.
Information
Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 210, prior to refueling. 2. Turn the tank lid counterclockwise.
CAUTION
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are no longer
ensured. There is risk of property damage. Re‐
fuel promptly.◀
Diesel engines
The filler neck is designed for refueling at die‐
sel fuel pumps. 3. Place the tank lid in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Closing
1. Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
208
Refueling Mobility
2. Close the fuel filler flap. age may occur to these surfaces. The
environment is polluted. There is risk of prop‐
WARNING
erty damage. Avoid overfilling.◀
The retaining strap of the fuel cap be
jammed and crushed during closing. In this The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
case, the lid cannot be correctly closed and off the first time.
fuel vapors or fuel can escape. There is risk of Observe safety regulations posted at the gas
injuries or risk of property damage. Pay atten‐ station.
tion that the retaining strap is not jammed or
crushed when closing the lid.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap

E. g. in the event of an electrical malfunction.
The release is located in the trunk.
1. Open the cover on the right side trim.
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump

symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when

refueling
CAUTION
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfill‐
ing of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys‐
tem. On contact with painted surfaces, dam‐
209
Mobility Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle features and options CAUTION
Even small amounts of wrong fuel or
wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and the engine. Furthermore, the catalytic
converter is permanently damaged. There is
risk of property damage. Do not refuel or add
the following in the case of gasoline engines:
systems. The respectively applicable country ▷ Leaded gasoline.
provisions must be observed when using the ▷ Metallic additives, e.g. manganese or iron.
respective features and systems. Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
Fuel recommendation pair shop.◀
General information Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of

10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.
Depending on the region, many gas stations
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or Ethanol should satisfy the following quality
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in standards:
winter helps make a cold start easier, e.g. US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
Information
xx: comply with the current standard in each
CAUTION case.
Even fuels that conform to the specifica‐ CAUTION
tions can be of low quality. This may cause en‐
Wrong fuels can damage the fuel system
gine problems, for instance poor engine start-
and the engine. There is risk of property dam‐
up behavior, poor handling and/or poor
age. Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol
performance. There is risk of property damage.
percentage than recommended or one with
In case of engine problems, switch gas sta‐
other types of alcohol, e.g. M5 to M100.◀
tions or use a brand name fuel with a higher
octane rating.◀
Recommended fuel grade
Gasoline BMW recommends AKI 91.
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐
Minimum fuel grade
tent. BMW recommends AKI 89.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ CAUTION
taining metal must not be used. Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
mum quality can compromise engine function
or cause engine damage. There is risk of prop‐
210
Fuel Mobility
erty damage. Do not fill with fuel that does not Low-Sulfur Diesel
comply with the minimum quality.◀ The engine of your BMW is designed for diesel
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐ with low sulfur content:
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel ASTM D 975-xx.
when starting at high outside temperatures. xx: comply with the current standard in each
This has no effect on the engine life. case.
CAUTION Use only Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result The fraction of biodiesel in the fuel must not
in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐ exceed 5%, referred to as B5. Do not use gas‐
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐ oline. If you do fill the tank with the wrong fuel,
ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐ e.g., gasoline, do not start the engine as this
ronmental conditions such as high ambient may damage the engine.
temperature and high altitude, may occur. In the case of incorrect refueling, contact a
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐ dealer’s service center or another qualified
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline service center or repair shop or Roadside As‐
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐ sistance.
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐ If the fuel pump nozzle does not fit in the filler
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pipe of your BMW, please check to ensure that
purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers. you are refueling at a diesel fuel pump that is
Failure to comply with these recommendations equipped with a diesel fuel pump nozzle.
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐ In the event the Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel fuel
tenance.◀ cannot be fully inserted into the fuel filler neck,
please contact BMW Roadside Assistance for
Diesel instructions on how to add fuel.
CAUTION For more information on Roadside Assistance,
Even small amounts of wrong fuel or refer to Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐
wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐ tainment and Communication.
tem and the engine. There is risk of property
damage.
Observe the following for diesel engines:
BMW Advanced Diesel
▷ Use only Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel. Maxi‐ The concept
mum content of biodiesel: 5 %, B5.
BMW Advanced Diesel reduces nitrogen ox‐
▷ Do not use rapeseed methyl ester RME. ides in the diesel emissions by injecting Diesel
▷ Do not use biodiesel above 5 %, B5. exhaust fluid into the exhaust system. A chem‐
▷ Do not use gasoline. ical reaction takes place inside the catalytic
converter that minimizes nitrogen oxides.
▷ No diesel additives.
The vehicle has two tanks, the active tank and
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
the passive tank. The active tank can be refil‐
ing the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s service
led in the engine compartment. BMW recom‐
mends that the passive tank is filled up by the
pair shop.◀
dealer’s service center within the course of
regular maintenance.
211
Mobility Fuel
To be able to start the engine as usual, there Have the Diesel exhaust fluid
must be an adequate Diesel exhaust fluid. replenished
BMW recommends that the Diesel exhaust
Warming up the system fluid be added by the dealer’s service center
In order to warm the engine up to its operating within the course of regular maintenance.
temperature after a cold start, the Steptronic In addition it may be necessary to have the
transmission may subsequently shift up to the fluid replenished several times under particular
next higher gear. circumstances, e.g., if the vehicle is driven in a
particularly sporty driving style or if it is driven
Displays in the instrument cluster at high altitudes.
The Diesel exhaust fluid must be replenished
Reserve indication
as soon as the reserve display appears in the
This display in the instrument cluster provides instrument cluster to avoid not being able to
information about the distance that can still be restart the engine.
driven with the current reserve level.
Do not continue driving to the limit of the re‐ Diesel exhaust fluid at low
maining travel distance. It is not possible to re‐ temperatures
start the engine after switching it off. Due to its physical properties, it is possible
▷ Lamp white: refill with Diesel that the Diesel exhaust fluid may also need to
exhaust fluid at the next op‐ be replenished between regular maintenance
portunity. appointments if it is exposed to temperatures
▷ Lamp yellow: not enough under + 23 ℉/- 5 ℃. In this case, add Diesel
Diesel exhaust fluid present. exhaust fluid only immediately before driving
The remaining range is dis‐ off.
played in the instrument At temperatures below + 12 ℉/- 11 ℃, the fill‐
cluster. Immediately refill ing level cannot be measured in some cases.
with Diesel exhaust fluid, re‐
fer to page 212. Replenishing Diesel exhaust fluid
yourself in exceptional cases
Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum
▷ The remaining range is dis‐ General information
played in the instrument You can replenish Diesel exhaust fluid yourself
cluster: add Diesel exhaust in exceptional cases, e.g., to get to your sched‐
fluid. The engine will con‐ uled service.
tinue to run as long as it is
not switched off and all Information
other operating conditions
WARNING
are satisfied; sufficient fuel,
e.g. Small amounts of ammonia fumes can
escape when opening the Diesel exhaust fluid
System malfunction container. Ammonia fumes have a pungent
odor and irritate skin, mucous membranes, and
eyes. There is risk of injuries. Do not inhale es‐
there is a system not working.
caping ammonia fumes. Avoid the contact of
articles of clothing, skin or eyes with Diesel ex‐
212
Fuel Mobility
haust fluid. Do not swallow any Diesel exhaust Tank for Diesel exhaust fluid
fluid. Keep children away from Diesel exhaust
fluids.◀
WARNING
Operating materials, e.g. oils, greases,
coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredi‐
ents. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
Observe the instructions on the containers.
Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or
eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐
erating materials into different bottles. Store The fuel cap for the Diesel exhaust fluid is lo‐
operating materials out of reach of children.◀ cated in the engine compartment.
CAUTION
Adding the Diesel exhaust fluid
The Diesel exhaust fluid ingredients are
Add the Diesel exhaust fluid when the ignition
very aggressive. There is risk of property dam‐
is switched on.
age. Avoid contact of Diesel exhaust fluid with
surfaces of the vehicle.◀ 1. Open the hood, refer to page 230.
2. Turn the tank lid counterclockwise and re‐
Suitable Diesel exhaust fluid move.
▷ Recommended: BMW Diesel Exhaust 3. Place the bottle on it and turn it as far as it
Fluid. With this bottle and its special will go, see arrow.
adapter, Diesel exhaust fluid can be replen‐
ished simply and safely.
▷ Alternatively recommended: NOx Diesel
exhaust fluid AUS 32.
Diesel exhaust fluid can be purchased at a
Refill quantity
When the Reserve display starts, add at least 4. Press the bottle down, see arrow.
3 bottles of Diesel exhaust fluid.
The vehicle tank will be filled.
This corresponds to approx. 1.5 US gal/6 liters.
213
Mobility Fuel
The tank is full when the fill level in the bot‐ Disposing of bottles
tle no longer changes. It is not possible to
Diesel exhaust fluid can be disposed of
overfill.
at a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Do not dispose of empty bottles with house‐
hold waste unless this is permitted by local
regulations.
Reserve indication
The Reserve display will still ap‐
pear along with the remaining
5. Pull back the bottle, see arrow, and un‐ range after refilling.
screw it. Engine can be started.
After several minutes of driving,
the Reserve indication goes out.
Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum

After filling, the indicator is still
displayed.
The engine can only be started
after the indicator goes out.
6. Replace the tank lid and turn it clockwise.
7. Close the hood.
The indicator goes out after approx. 1 mi‐
Filling with an incorrect fluid nute.
2. Engine can be started.
Information
WARNING
After adding an incorrect fluid, e.g. anti‐
freeze for washer fluid, the system can heat
and ignite. There is risk of fire and injuries. Do
not add incorrect fluids. Do not start the engine
after adding an incorrect fluid.◀

an incorrect fluid is added.
In the case that an incorrect liquid was refilled,
contact a dealer’s service center or another
214
Wheels and tires Mobility
Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
This chapter describes all standard, country- than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
specific and optional features offered with the been parked for at least 2 hours.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar, 2 psi.
also applies to safety-related functions and For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire
systems. The respectively applicable country inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire
provisions must be observed when using the Monitor.
respective features and systems. For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting the
tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure
Monitor.
Tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure specifications
Safety information The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐ page 216, contains all tire inflation pressure
sure influence the following: specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
▷ The service life of the tires. ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐
sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
▷ Road safety. manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
▷ Driving comfort. type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
Checking the tire inflation pressure please note the following:
WARNING ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
A tire with low or missing tire inflation ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
pressure impacts handling, such as steering
and braking response. There is risk of an acci‐ Tire inflation pressures up to
dent. Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐ 100 mph/160 km/h
sure, and correct it as needed, e.g. twice a
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
month and before a long trip.◀
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
Also check the tire inflation pressure of the values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
emergency wheel in the trunk regularly, and to page 216, and adjust as necessary.
correct it as needed.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐
flation pressure.
Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐
tion pressure increases along with the tire's
temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐
fications relate to cold tires or tires with the
ambient temperature.
215
Mobility Wheels and tires
Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI
Front: 275/40 R 20 2.5 / 36 -

106 W XL RSC - 2.8 / 41
Rear: 315/35 R 20
110 W XL RSC
Front: 275/40 R 20 2.5 / 36 -

106 V M+S XL RSC - 2.8 / 41
These pressure values can also be found on
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's Rear: 315/35 R 20
door pillar. 110 V M+S XL RSC
Front: 285/35 R 21 2.5 / 36 -

Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
105 Y XL RSC - 3.0 / 44
Tire inflation pressure values up to Rear: 325/30 R 21
100 mph/160 km/h 108 Y XL RSC
Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of

X5 sDrive35i, X5 xDrive35i, 50 mph / 80 km/h
X5 xDrive50i, X5 xDrive35d with two T 155/90 D 18 113
rows of seats M 4.2 / 60
T 155/80 R 19 114
Tire size Pressure specifications M
in bar/PSI
Specifications in X5 sDrive35i, X5 xDrive35i,

bar/PSI with cold X5 xDrive50i, X5 xDrive35d with three
tires rows of seats
Tire size Pressure specifications

255/55 R 18 109 H 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41 in bar/PSI
M+S XL A/S RSC
Specifications in
255/55 R 18 109 H bar/PSI with cold
M+S XL RSC tires
255/50 R 19 107 H 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44
M+S XL A/S RSC
255/55 R 18 109 H 2.2 / 32 2.7 / 39
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL A/S RSC
M+S XL RSC
255/55 R 18 109 H
Front: 255/50 R 19 2.5 / 36 - M+S XL RSC
107 W XL RSC - 2.8 / 41 255/50 R 19 107 H 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42
Rear: 285/45 R 19 M+S XL A/S RSC
111 W XL RSC
255/50 R 19 107 H
M+S XL RSC
216
Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
Front: 255/50 R 19 2.4 / 35 - Specifications in

107 W XL RSC - 2.7 / 39 bar/PSI with cold
Rear: 285/45 R 19 tires
111 W XL RSC
Front: 275/40 R 20 2.4 / 35 - 255/55 R 18 109 H 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45

106 W XL RSC - 2.7 / 39 M+S XL A/S RSC
Rear: 315/35 R 20 255/55 R 18 109 H
110 W XL RSC M+S XL RSC
Front: 275/40 R 20 2.4 / 35 - 255/50 R 19 107 H 2.8 / 41 3.3 / 48

106 V M+S XL RSC - 2.7 / 39 M+S XL A/S RSC
Rear: 315/35 R 20 255/50 R 19 107 H
110 V M+S XL RSC M+S XL RSC
Front: 285/35 R 21 2.4 / 35 - Front: 255/50 R 19 2.8 / 41 -

105 Y XL RSC - 2.9 /42 107 W XL RSC - 3.0 / 44
Rear: 325/30 R 21 Rear: 285/45 R 19
108 Y XL RSC 111 W XL RSC
Front: 275/40 R 20 2.8 / 41 -

Tire inflation pressures at max. 106 W XL RSC - 3.0 / 44
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h Rear: 315/35 R 20
WARNING 110 W XL RSC
In order to drive at maximum speeds in Front: 275/40 R 20 2.8 / 41 -
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, 106 V M+S XL RSC - 3.2 / 46
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
Rear: 315/35 R 20
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
110 V M+S XL RSC
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀ Front: 285/35 R 21 2.8 / 41 -
105 Y XL RSC - 3.2 / 46
Tire inflation pressure values over Rear: 325/30 R 21
100 mph/160 km/h 108 Y XL RSC
X5 sDrive35i, X5 xDrive35i, Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of

X5 xDrive35d with two rows of seats T 155/90 D 18 113 50 mph / 80 km/h
Without Sport Package M 4.2 / 60
T 155/80 R 19 114
M
With Sport Package
217
Tire size Pressure specifica‐ Tire size Pressure specifications

tions in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
Specifications in Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold bar/PSI with cold
tires tires
255/55 R 18 109 H 2.9 /42 3.4 / 49 255/55 R 18 109 H 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44

M+S XL RSC M+S XL A/S RSC
255/50 R 19 107 H 255/55 R 18 109 H
M+S XL RSC M+S XL RSC
Front: 255/50 R 19 2.9 /42 - 255/50 R 19 107 H 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46

Rear: 285/45 R 19 255/50 R 19 107 H
Front: 275/40 R 20 2.9 /42 - Front: 255/50 R 19 2.7 / 39 -

106 W XL RSC - 3.2 / 46 107 W XL RSC - 3.0 / 44
Rear: Rear: 285/45 R 19
315/35 R 20 110 W 111 W XL RSC
XL RSC
Front: 275/40 R 20 2.7 / 39 -
Front: 275/40 R 20 2.9 /42 - 106 W XL RSC - 3.0 / 44
106 V M+S XL RSC - 3.2 / 46 Rear: 315/35 R 20
Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC
110 V M+S XL RSC
Front: 275/40 R 20 2.7 / 39 -
Front: 285/35 R 21 2.9 /42 - 106 V M+S XL RSC - 3.2 / 46
105 Y XL RSC - 3.4 / 49 Rear: 315/35 R 20
Rear: 325/30 R 21 110 V M+S XL RSC
108 Y XL RSC
Front: 285/35 R 21 2.7 / 39 -
Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of 105 Y XL RSC - 3.2 / 46
T 155/90 D 18 113 50 mph / 80 km/h Rear: 325/30 R 21
M 4.2 / 60 108 Y XL RSC
T 155/80 R 19 114
M With Sport Package
X5 sDrive35i, X5 xDrive35i,
X5 xDrive35d with three rows of seats
Without Sport Package
218

tires tires
255/55 R 18 109 H 2.9 /42 3.4 / 49 255/55 R 18 109 H 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45

255/50 R 19 107 H 255/55 R 18 109 H
Front: 255/50 R 19 2.9 /42 - 255/50 R 19 107 H 2.8 / 41 3.3 / 48

Rear: 285/45 R 19 255/50 R 19 107 H
Front: 275/40 R 20 2.9 /42 - Front: 255/50 R 19 2.8 / 41 -

106 W XL RSC - 3.2 / 46 107 W XL RSC - 3.0 / 44
Rear: 315/35 R 20 Rear: 285/45 R 19
110 W XL RSC 111 W XL RSC
Front: 275/40 R 20 2.9 /42 - Front: 275/40 R 20 2.8 / 41 -

106 V M+S XL RSC - 3.2 / 46 106 W XL RSC - 3.0 / 44
Rear: 315/35 R 20 Rear: 315/35 R 20
110 V M+S XL RSC 110 W XL RSC
Front: 285/35 R 21 2.9 /42 - Front: 275/40 R 20 2.8 / 41 -

105 Y XL RSC - 3.4 / 49 106 V M+S XL RSC - 3.2 / 46
Rear: 325/30 R 21 Rear: 315/35 R 20
108 Y XL RSC 110 V M+S XL RSC
Front: 285/35 R 21 2.8 / 41 -

X5 xDrive50i with two rows of seats 105 Y XL RSC - 3.2 / 46
Without Sport Package Rear: 325/30 R 21
108 Y XL RSC
Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of

T 155/90 D 18 113 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60
T 155/80 R 19 114
M
With Sport Package
219

tires tires
255/55 R 18 109 H 2.9 /42 3.4 / 49 255/55 R 18 109 H 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44

255/50 R 19 107 H 255/55 R 18 109 H
Front: 255/50 R 19 2.9 /42 - 255/50 R 19 107 H 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46

Rear: 285/45 R 19 255/50 R 19 107 H
Front: 275/40 R 20 3.0 / 44 - Front: 255/50 R 19 2.7 / 39 -

106 W XL RSC - 3.5 / 51 107 W XL RSC - 3.0 / 44
Rear: 315/35 R 20 Rear: 285/45 R 19
110 W XL RSC 111 W XL RSC
Front: 275/40 R 20 3.0 / 44 - Front: 275/40 R 20 2.7 / 39 -

106 V M+S XL - 3.5 / 51 106 W XL RSC - 3.0 / 44
RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20
Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC
110 V M+S XL
Front: 275/40 R 20 2.7 / 39 -
RSC
106 V M+S XL RSC - 3.2 / 46
Front: 285/35 R 21 2.9 /42 - Rear: 315/35 R 20
105 Y XL RSC - 3.4 / 49 110 V M+S XL RSC
Rear: 325/30 R 21
Front: 285/35 R 21 2.7 / 39 -
108 Y XL RSC
105 W XL RSC - 3.2 / 46
Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of Rear: 325/30 R 21
T 155/90 D 18 113 50 mph / 80 km/h 108 W XL RSC
M 4.2 / 60
T 155/80 R 19 114 With Sport Package
M
X5 xDrive50i with three rows of seats

Without Sport Package
220
Tire size Pressure specifications Speed letter

in bar/PSI Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h
Specifications in R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h

bar/PSI with cold S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h
tires T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
255/55 R 18 109 H 2.9 /42 3.4 / 49 V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
M+S XL RSC W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
255/50 R 19 107 H Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
M+S XL RSC
Front: 255/50 R 19 2.9 /42 - Tire Identification Number

107 W XL RSC - 3.4 / 49 DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0115
Rear: 285/45 R 19 xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
111 W XL RSC xxx: tire size and tire design
Front: 275/40 R 20 2.9 /42 - 0115: tire age
106 W XL RSC - 3.4 / 49 Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
Rear: 315/35 R 20 the U.S. Department of Transportation.
110 W XL RSC
Tire age
Front: 275/40 R 20 2.9 /42 -
DOT … 0115: the tire was manufactured in the
106 V M+S XL RSC - 3.4 / 49 1st week of 2015.
Rear: 315/35 R 20
110 V M+S XL RSC Recommendation
Front: 285/35 R 21 2.9 /42 - Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at
105 Y XL RSC - 3.4 / 49 least every 6 years.
Rear: 325/30 R 21
108 Y XL RSC Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
Tire identification marks
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;
Tire size Temperature A
245/45 R 18 96 Y
DOT Quality Grades
245: nominal width in mm
Treadwear
45: aspect ratio in %
Traction AA A B C
R: radial tire code
Temperature A B C
18: rim diameter in inches
All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐
96: load rating, not for ZR tires eral Safety Requirements in addition to these
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires grades.
221
Treadwear WARNING
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, in combination, can cause heat buildup and
times as well on the government course as a possible tire failure.◀
tire graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of RSC – Run-flat tires
their use, however, and may depart signifi‐
Run-flat tires, refer to page 225, are labeled
cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐
with a circular symbol containing the letters
ing habits, service practices and differences in
RSC marked on the sidewall.
road characteristics and climate.
M+S
Traction
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
weather performance than summer tires.
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
Tire tread
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
Summer tires
marked C may have poor traction performance.
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
0.12 in/3 mm.
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering, There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
Temperature Winter tires

The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the 0.16 in/4 mm.
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
heat when tested under controlled conditions less suitable for winter operation.
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band
A represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
quired by law.
222
Minimum tread depth WARNING

Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is risk of an accident. If tire dam‐
age is suspected while driving, immediately re‐
duce speed and stop. Have wheels and tires
checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to
the nearest dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop. Have
vehicle towed or transported as needed.◀
Wear indicators are distributed around the WARNING

tire's circumference and have the legally re‐
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
They are marked on the side of the tire with control. There is risk of an accident. Do not re‐
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator. pair damaged tires, but have them replaced.◀
Tire damage Changing wheels and tires

General information Mounting
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. out by a dealer’s service center or another
Information
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, Wheel and tire combination
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and other qualified service center or repair shop
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur about the right wheel/tire combination and
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐ wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your the function of a variety of systems such as
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped ABS or DSC.
with low-profile tires.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐ sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
functions: figuration from a single manufacturer.
▷ Unusual vibrations while driving. Following tire damage, have the original wheel
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐ and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
dency to pull to the left or right. as soon as possible.
Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over WARNING
curbs, road damage, or similar things.
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐
cle, e. g. due to contact with the body due to
223
tolerances despite the same official size rating. Maximum speed of winter tires
There is risk of an accident.◀ If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
Recommended tire brands then a respective symbol is displayed in your
field of vision. The plate is available from a
With mounted winter tires, observe and adhere
to the permissible maximum speed.
Run-flat tires
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
own safety you should replace them only with
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐ the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These case of a flat tire. A dealer’s service center or
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. another qualified service center or repair shop
will be glad to answer additional questions at
any time.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐ Rotating wheels between axles
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new; Different wear patterns can occur on the front
they achieve their full traction potential after a and rear axles depending on individual driving
break-in time. conditions. The tires can be rotated between
Drive conservatively for the first the axles to achieve even wear. A dealer’s
200 miles/300 km. service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop will be glad to answer addi‐
Retreaded tires tional questions at any time. After rotating,
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ check the tire pressure and correct if needed.
ommend the use of retreaded tires. Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehi‐
cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the
WARNING
front and rear axles.
Retreated tires can have different tire
casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐ Storage
ice life can be limited. There is risk of an acci‐
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
dent. Do not use retreated tires.◀
as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
Winter tires
grease and fuels.
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
winter roads.
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
224
Run-flat tires Information

▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
Label lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 in/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire.
RSC label on the tire sidewall. ▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐ container and apply it to the steering
porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐ wheel.
cial rims. ▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to wheel electronics. In this case, have the
remain drivable to a restricted degree in the electronics checked at the next opportu‐
event of a tire inflation pressure loss. nity and have them replaced if needed.
Follow the instructions for continued driving DANGER

with a flat tire. If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
Changing run-flat tires enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. A less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
dealer’s service center or another qualified haust gases can also accumulate outside of
service center or repair shop will be glad to an‐ the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the
swer additional questions at any time. exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀
Mobility System Storage

The Mobility System is located behind the left
The concept side trim in the trunk.
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
can be sealed quickly to enable continued
travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
into the tires, which seals the damage from the
inside.
The compressor can be used to check the tire
inflation pressure.
225
Sealant container Filling the tire with sealant

1. Shake the sealant container.
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.

▷ Filling hose, arrow 2. 2. Pull the connection hose fully out of the
Observe use-by date on the sealant container. compressor housing. Do not kink the hose.
Compressor
3. Screw the connection hose onto the con‐

nector of the sealant container.
1 Holder for bottle
2 Compressor
3 Connector/cable for socket
4 Connection hose
5 On/off switch
6 Inflation pressure dial
7 Reduce inflation pressure
226
4. Insert the sealant container on the com‐ 7. With the ignition turned on or the engine
pressor housing in an upright position. running, switch on the compressor.
5. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con‐ CAUTION

tainer onto the tire valve of the nonworking The compressor can overheat during ex‐
wheel. tended operation. There is risk of property
damage. Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 min.◀
Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi‐

nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a
tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compres‐
sor at this point.
6. With the compressor switched off, insert If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not
the plug into the power socket inside the reached:
vehicle.
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel.
3. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
tribute the sealant in the tire.
4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be
reached, contact your dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Stowing the Mobility System

1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer from the wheel.
2. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the sealant container.
3. Connect the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer previously connected to the tire
227
valve with the available connector on the Snow chains

sealant container.
This prevents leftover sealant from escap‐ Fine-link snow chains
ing from the container. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
4. Wrap the empty sealant container in suita‐ use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
ble material to avoid dirtying the trunk. fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
5. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐ manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
cle. as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
Distributing the sealant available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐ other qualified service center or repair shop.
sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the
tire. Use
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h. ▷ 255/55 R 18.
▷ 255/50 R 19.
To correct the tire inflation pressure Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
1. Stop at a suitable location. tions.
2. Screw the connection hose of the com‐ Make sure that the snow chains are always
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem. sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐
3. Insert the connector into the power socket ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions.
inside the vehicle. Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
2.5 bar. in incorrect readings.
▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
turned on or the engine running, switch mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
on the compressor. in incorrect readings.
▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐ When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
ton on the compressor. Dynamic Traction Control if needed.
Continuing the trip Maximum speed with snow chains

Do not exceed the maximum permissible Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. when using snow chains.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System as soon as
possible.
228
Engine compartment Mobility
Engine compartment
Important features in the engine comp.
1 Washer fluid reservoir 5 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal

2 Vehicle identification number 6 Oil filler neck
3 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal 7 Diesel engine:
4 Coolant reservoir Container for diesel exhaust fluid
229
Mobility Engine compartment
Hood Opening the hood

1. Pull the lever.
Information
WARNING
Improperly executed work in the engine
compartment can damage components and
lead to a safety risk. There is risk of accidents
or risk of property damage.◀
WARNING
The engine compartment accommo‐
dates moving components. Certain compo‐
2. Press the release handle and open the
nents can move in the engine compartment
hood.
with the vehicle switched off, e.g. the cooler
fan. There is risk of injuries. Do not reach into
the area of moving parts. Keep articles of
clothing and hair away from moving parts.◀
CAUTION
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is risk of
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
hood.◀
WARNING
There are protruding parts, e.g. lock
hook, on the inside of the hood. There is risk of
injuries. If the hood is open, pay attention to
protruding parts and keep these areas clear.◀
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open
while driving and restrict visibility. There is risk
of an accident. Stop immediately and correctly
close the hood.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed on opening
and closing the hood. There is risk of injuries.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
hood is clear during opening and closing.◀
230
Engine compartment Mobility
Closing the hood
Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16

in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
The hood must audibly engage on both sides.
231
Mobility Engine oil
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options Electronic oil measurement
Status display
The concept
the selected options or country versions. This The engine oil level is monitored electronically
also applies to safety-related functions and while driving and shown on the Control Dis‐
systems. The respectively applicable country play.
provisions must be observed when using the If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
respective features and systems. level, a check control message is displayed.
Requirements
General information A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip
the driving style and driving conditions.
is displayed.
The engine oil consumption can increase in
With frequent short-distance trips, regularly
the following situations, for example:
perform a detailed measurement.
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine. Displaying the engine oil level
▷ Idling of the engine. On the Control Display:
▷ With use of engine oil types that are not 1. "Vehicle info"
approved.
2. "Vehicle status"
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
3. "Engine oil level"
after refueling.
The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil Engine oil level display messages
measurement.
CAUTION
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐
uring principles: A too low engine oil level causes engine
damage. There is risk of property damage. Im‐
▷ Status display
mediately add engine oil.◀
▷ Detailed measurement
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
CAUTION
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is risk of
property damage. Do not add too much engine
oil. Have too much engine oil siphoned off by a
service center or repair shop.◀
232
Engine oil Mobility
Different messages appear on the display de‐ Adding engine oil

pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention
to these messages. Information
If the engine oil level is too low, within the next
CAUTION
125 miles/200 km Add engine oil, refer to
page 233. A too low engine oil level causes engine
damage. There is risk of property damage.
Detailed measurement Add engine oil within the next
125 miles/200 km.◀
The concept
CAUTION
In the detailed measurement the engine oil
level is checked and displayed via a scale. Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is risk of
Gasoline engine:
property damage. Do not add too much engine
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum oil. Have too much engine oil siphoned off by a
level, a check control message is displayed. dealer’s service center or another qualified
Diesel engine: service center or repair shop.◀
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum WARNING
level or an overfilling is detected, a check con‐
Operating materials, e.g. oils, greases,
trol message is displayed.
coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredi‐
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐ ents. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
creased somewhat. Observe the instructions on the containers.
Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or
Requirements eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐
▷ Vehicle is on level road. erating materials into different bottles. Store
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in operating materials out of reach of children.◀
selector lever position N or P and accelera‐
tor pedal not depressed. General information
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐ Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
perature. played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
Performing a detailed measurement played in the instrument cluster.
In order to perform a detailed measurement of Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐
the engine oil level: cle before engine oil is added.
1. "Vehicle info"
Overview
2. "Vehicle status"
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
3. "Measure engine oil level" partment, refer to page 229.
4. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed Opening the oil filler neck
via a scale. 1. Opening the hood, refer to page 230
Time: approx. 1 minute.
233
Mobility Engine oil
2. Turn the oil filler neck counter-clockwise. Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01.
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
Diesel engine
BMW Longlife-04.
BMW Longlife-12 FE.
3. Add motor oil.

More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
After refilling, perform a detailed measure‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
ment, refer to page 233.
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Engine oil types to add Alternative engine oil types

Information If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
CAUTION gine oil with the following oil rating can be
Oil additives can damage the engine. added:
There is risk of property damage. Do not use
Gasoline engine
oil additives.◀
API SL or superior oil rating.
CAUTION
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐
tions in the engine or damage it. There is risk Diesel engine
of property damage. When selecting an engine API CJ-4.
oil, make sure that the engine oil has the cor‐
rect viscosity grade.◀
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of Engine oil change
the engine.
CAUTION
Viscosity grades Engine oil that is not changed in timely
When selecting an engine oil, ensure that the fashion can cause increased engine wear and
engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity thus engine damage. There is risk of property
grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40, damage. Do not exceed the service data indi‐
SAE 5W-30, 0W-20 or 5W-20. cated in the vehicle.◀
The viscosity grades 0W-20 and 5W-20 are The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
only suitable for particular engines. you let the dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop change
Suitable engine oil types the motor oil.
Add engine oils that meet the following oil rat‐
ing standards:
234
Engine oil Mobility
235
Mobility Coolant
Coolant
Vehicle features and options ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop and add coolant as needed.
specific and optional features offered with the Overview
Depending on the engine installation, the cool‐
ant reservoir is located on the right side or the
left side of the engine compartment.
Checking
respective features and systems. 1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
Information pressure to dissipate, then open it.
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
burns. There is risk of injuries. Only open the
cooling system with the engine cooled down.◀
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐
tives can damage the engine. There is risk of
injuries and risk of property damage. Avoid the 3. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes with 4. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
additives. Do not swallow any additives. Use tween the minimum and maximum marks
suitable additives only.◀ in the filler neck.
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐
able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Coolant level
General information
If there is no Min. and Max. mark in the filler
neck of the coolant reservoir, have the coolant
level checked if needed by your dealer’s serv‐
236
Coolant Mobility
Adding
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up

to the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Turn the lid until there is an audible click.
The arrows on the coolant reservoir and
the lid must point towards one another.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
237
Mobility Maintenance
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control. The
dealer’s service center can read this data out
and suggest an optimized maintenance scope
for your vehicle.
also applies to safety-related functions and Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
systems. The respectively applicable country control with which the vehicle was driven most
provisions must be observed when using the recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
BMW maintenance system tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐ another qualified service center or repair shop
erational reliability of the vehicle. update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
In some cases scopes and intervals may vary necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
according to the country-specific version. Re‐ crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐
cants and wear materials are calculated sepa‐
rately. Further information is available from a
Service and Warranty
service center or repair shop. Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Condition Based Service Canadian models
CBS Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
count the driving conditions of your vehicle. and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐ els for additional information on service re‐
nizes the maintenance requirements. quirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
amount of maintenance corresponding to your that maintenance and repair be performed by a
user profile. dealer’s service center or another qualified
Detailed information on service requirements, service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐
refer to page 95, can be displayed on the Con‐ lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐
trol Display. tained.
238
Maintenance Mobility
Socket for OBD Onboard trol components, in particular the catalytic

converter.
Diagnosis
Information
CAUTION
Improper use of the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis can lead to vehicle malfunctions.
There is risk of property damage. The manu‐
facturer of your vehicle strongly recommends
access to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be
limited to a dealer's service center, another
qualified service center or repair shop or other
authorized persons.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for

checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
239
Mobility Replacing components
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options Wiper blade replacement
Information
series. It also describes features that are not CAUTION
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to If the wiper arm falls onto the windshield
the selected options or country versions. This without the wiper blades installed, the wind‐
also applies to safety-related functions and shield can be damaged. There is risk of prop‐
systems. The respectively applicable country erty damage. Secure the wiper arm when re‐
provisions must be observed when using the placing the wiper blades and do not fold down
respective features and systems. the wipers without the wiper blades installed.◀
CAUTION
Onboard vehicle tool kit Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is risk of
1. Fold up the cargo floor panel. property damage. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Replacing the front wiper blades

1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer
to page 79, the wiper arms.
2. Lift the wiper all the way off of the wind‐
shield.
2. Remove the onboard vehicle tool kit.
240
Replacing components Mobility
3. Fold open the holder. Lamp and bulb replacement

General information
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
tion to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you have appropriate work performed by a
service center or repair shop if you are unfami‐
liar with it or if it has not been described here.
4. Slide wiper blade out of the wiper arm. A spare lamp box is available from a dealer’s
ter or repair shop.
Information
Lights and bulbs

WARNING
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐
tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is
5. Insert the new wiper blade and press it on risk of injuries. Only change bulbs after they
until it you hear it snap into the holder. have cooled off.◀
6. Fold down the wipers.
WARNING
Replacing the rear wiper blade Work on switched-on lighting systems
can cause short circuits. There is risk of inju‐
1. Fold up the wiper arm.
ries or risk of property damage. When working
2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back. on the lighting system, switch off the lamps in
question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐
turer's instructions.◀
CAUTION
Contaminated bulbs reduce their service
life. There is risk of property damage. Do not
hold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a
clean cloth or something similar, or hold the
bulb by its base.◀
3. Continue turning the wiper blade all the

way so that it pops out of the holder. Xenon headlights
4. Press the new wiper blade into the holder DANGER
until you hear it snap into place. There can be high voltage in the lighting
5. Fold the wipers in. system. There is danger to life. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle recommends that the
work on the lighting system including bulb re‐
241
placement be performed by a dealer’s service Front lights, bulb replacement

pair shop.◀ Xenon headlights
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Information

Some items of equipment use light-emitting Because of the long service life of these bulbs,
diodes installed behind a cover as a light the likelihood of failure is very low. Switching
source. the lights on and off frequently shortens their
service life.
These light-emitting diodes, which are related
to conventional lasers, are officially designated If a bulb fails, turn on the front fog lights and
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes. continue the trip with great care. Comply with
local regulations.
WARNING
DANGER
Too intensive brightness can irritate or
damage the retina of the eye. There is risk of There can be high voltage in the lighting
injuries. Do not look directly into the headlights system. There is danger to life. The manufac‐
or other light sources for an extended period of turer of your vehicle recommends that the
time. Do not remove the LED covers.◀ work on the lighting system including bulb re‐
placement be performed by a dealer’s service
Headlight glass pair shop.◀
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,
driving with the lights switched on, the con‐ contact a dealer’s service center or another
densation evaporates after a short time. The qualified service center or repair shop.
headlight glass does not need to be changed.
Overview
If despite driving with the lights switched on,
increasing humidity forms, e. g. water droplets
in the lamp, the manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends having it checked by a dealer’s
ter or repair shop.
Headlight setting
The headlight adjustments can be affected by
changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight
adjustment was changed, have it checked and, 1 Parking lights / daytime running lights
if necessary, corrected by a dealer’s service 2 Low beams/high beams/headlight flasher
3 Turn signal
pair shop.
Xenon headlights
Low beams and high beams are designed with
xenon technology.
242
The parking lights and daylight running lights Turn signal in exterior mirror
are made using LED technology. The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature
Contact a dealer’s service center or another LED technology. Contact a dealer’s service
qualified service center or repair shop in the center or another qualified service center or re‐
event of a malfunction. pair shop in the event of a malfunction.
LED headlights Front fog lights/cornering lights

With LED headlights, all front lights and side
indicators are designed with LED technology. Information
If an LED fails, switch on the front fog lights Follow general instructions, refer to page 241.
and continue the trip with great care. Comply
with local regulations. Replacement
Contact a dealer’s service center or another 55-watt bulb, H11.
qualified service center or repair shop in the 1. Insert the screwdriver from the onboard
event of a malfunction. vehicle tool kit, with the flat side on the clip,
arrow 1.
Turn signal
Information
Follow general instructions, refer to page 241.
Replacement
21-watt bulb, PY 21W.
1. Opening the hood, refer to page 230

2. Unscrew the lid counterclockwise and re‐
move it carefully. 2. Turn the screwdriver by 90°, arrow 2.
The bulb is attached to the lid. 3. Remove the front fog lamp toward the
front.
4. Detach the connector.
3. Turn the bulb clockwise to remove it.

4. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in
the reverse order.
243
5. Turn the bulb bracket and remove it. Jacking points for the vehicle jack
6. Remove the bulb and replace it. The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
7. Proceed in reverse order to insert the front cated at the positions shown.
fog lamp. Note the guide rails in doing so.
Emergency wheel
LED front fog lights
These front fog lights are made using LED Safety measures
technology. Contact a dealer’s service center ▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
or another qualified service center or repair from passing traffic and on solid ground.
shop in the event of a malfunction. Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake and engage lever in
Tail lights, bulb replacement position P P.
LED tail lights ▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
These tail lights are made using LED technol‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
ogy. Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
such as behind a guardrail.
other qualified service center or repair shop in
the event of a malfunction. ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
portable hazard warning lamp at an appro‐
priate distance.
Changing wheels ▷ Perform wheel change only on a flat, solid
and slip-resistant surface. On soft or slip‐
Information pery ground, e.g., snow, ice, tiles, etc., the
vehicle or vehicle jack can slip away to the
When using run-flat tires or sealants, a tire
side.
does not need to be changed immediately in
the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire. ▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items
under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot
The tools for changing wheels are available as
reach its carrying capacity because of the
accessories from your dealer’s service center
restricted height.
or another qualified service center or repair
shop. ▷ If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the
vehicle and do not start the engine; other‐
wise, a fatal hazard exists.
244
Information Prepare wheel change

WARNING 1. Follow the Safety instructions, refer to
page 245.
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
the vehicle and for the jacking points on the 2. Loosen the wheel lug bolts a half turn.
vehicle only. There is risk of injuries. Do not lift
any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle Jacking up the vehicle
jack.◀ 1. Place the vehicle jack at the jacking point
closest to the wheel such that the vehicle
Overview jack foot is vertically beneath the vehicle
jacking point with the entire surface on the
The emergency wheel and the tools are lo‐
ground.
cated in the trunk under the cargo floor panel.
2. Insert the vehicle jack head in the rectan‐

1 Emergency wheel
gular recess of the jacking point for crank‐
2 Vehicle jack ing it up.
3 Vehicle jack crank 3. Crank it up until the wheel in question lifts
4 Wheel lug wrench off of the ground.
Wheel mounting
Removing the emergency wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only.
1. Unscrew the wheel lug bolts and remove

the wheel.
2. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two bolts.
If original BMW light alloy wheels are not
mounted, any accompanying lug bolts also
have to be used.
3. Screw in the remaining the lug bolts and
1. Remove tool holder. tighten all bolts well in a crosswise pattern.
2. Unscrew the wing nut 1. 4. Lower the vehicle and remove the vehicle
3. Remove the washer 2 to the side. jack.
4. Remove emergency wheel.
245
After the wheel change Battery replacement

1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐ CAUTION
ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the trunk. can damage vehicle systems and impair vehi‐
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored cle functions.There is risk of property damage.
under the cargo floor panel because of its Information on the compatible vehicle batteries
size. is available at your dealer's service center.◀
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐ After a battery replacement, the manufacturer
portunity and correct as needed. of your vehicle recommends that the vehicle
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. battery be registered on the vehicle by a
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor. dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop to ensure that all
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight comfort features are fully available and that any
with a calibrated torque wrench. Check Control messages of these comfort fea‐
6. Replace the damaged tires as soon as pos‐ tures are no longer displayed.
sible.
Charging the battery
Driving with emergency wheel
WARNING General information
The emergency wheel has particular di‐ Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐
mensions. When driving with an emergency ciently charged to guarantee that the battery
wheel, changed driving properties may occur remains usable for its full service life.
at higher speeds, e.g. reduced lane stability The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
when braking, longer braking distance and lowing cases:
changed self-steering properties in the limit ▷ When making frequent short-distance
area. There is risk of an accident. Drive moder‐ drives.
ately and do not exceed a speed of
▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
riods, longer than a month.
Information
Vehicle battery CAUTION
Maintenance Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
The battery is maintenance-free.
which means that the 12V on-board network
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the can be overloaded or damaged. There is risk of
service life of the battery. property damage. Only connect battery charg‐
More information about the battery can be re‐ ers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐ terminals in the engine compartment.◀
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 250, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
246
Power failure In the car's interior

After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be newly initialized or individual set‐
tings updated, e. g.:
▷ Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory:
store the positions again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system, refer to
page 50.
Loosen fasteners, arrows, and open cover.
Disposing of old batteries

In the trunk
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses Open the cover on the right side trim, arrow.
Information Information on the fuse types and locations is

WARNING found on a separate sheet.
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload

electrical lines and components. There is risk
of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse
and do not replace a nonworking fuse with a
substitute of another color or amperage rat‐
ing.◀
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse

types and locations are stored in the fuse box
in the trunk.
247
Mobility Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options Overview

SOS button in the roofliner
Hazard warning flashers Requirements

▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
▷ The radio-ready state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
Initiating an Emergency Request

1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the
The button is located in the center console. button lights up green.
▷ The LED lights up green: an Emergency
Request was initiated.
Intelligent Emergency If a cancel prompt appears on the display,
the Emergency Request can be aborted.
Request
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
The concept until the voice connection has been estab‐
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐ lished.
quest can be made through this system. ▷ The LED flashes green when a connection
to the BMW Response Center has been
General information established.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency. When the emergency request is received
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request at the BMW Response Center, the BMW
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable con‐ Response Center contacts you and takes
ditions. further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
248
Breakdown assistance Mobility
steps to help you under certain circum‐ First-aid kit

stances.
For this, data are transmitted to the BMW Information
Response Center which serve to deter‐ Some of the articles have a limited service life.
mine the necessary rescue measures. E. g.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
the current position of the vehicle, if it can
regularly and replace any expired items
be established.
promptly.
▷ If the LED is flashing green, but the BMW
Response Center can no longer be heard Storage
via the speaker, you can nevertheless still
1. Open the cover on the left side trim.
be heard at the BMW Response Center.
Initiating an Emergency Request

automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐
ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS
button.
2. Remove the first-aid kit.

Warning triangle
1. Open the cover on the left side trim.
Jump-starting
2. Lift the warning triangle slightly and re‐
move in the direction of the interior. General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
249
Information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is risk of injuries or
danger to life. Do not touch any components
that are under voltage.◀
To prevent personal injury or damage to both

vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure. The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐
gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐
Preparation tive terminal.
CAUTION
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is risk of property dam‐
age. Make sure that no body contact occurs.◀
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐

hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐
mation can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle. The body ground or a special nut acts as the
battery negative terminal.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Connecting the cables
Starting aid terminals 1. Open the cover of the BMW starting aid
WARNING terminal.
If the jumper cables are connected in the 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
incorrect order, sparks formation can occur. jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
There is risk of injuries. Pay attention to the battery, or to the corresponding starting
correct order during connection.◀ aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
250
corresponding engine or body ground of Transporting the vehicle

the vehicle to be started.
Information
Starting the engine CAUTION
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐ risk of property damage. The vehicle should
creased idle speed. only be transported on a loading platform.◀
If the vehicle to be started has a diesel en‐
gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle Tow truck
run for approx. 10 minutes.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order. The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
Check the battery and recharge if needed.
CAUTION
When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting
Tow-starting and towing or body and chassis parts; damage can occur
on vehicle parts. There is risk of property dam‐
Information age. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions Towing other vehicles
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated, Information
WARNING
ing function. There is risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to If the approved gross vehicle weight of
tow-starting/towing.◀ the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse. There is risk of an accident! Make sure
that the gross vehicle weight of the towing ve‐
hicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed.◀
251
CAUTION Tow fitting

If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can General information
occur. There is risk of property damage. Cor‐
rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting.◀
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐

pending on local regulations.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
Tow bar ried in the vehicle.
The tow fittings used should be on the same The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front
side on both vehicles. or rear of the BMW.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit,
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe refer to page 240, are together in the cargo
the following: area.
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners. Information
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it CAUTION
is secured with an offset. If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
there can be damage to the vehicle or to the
Tow rope tow fitting. There is risk of property damage.
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure Observe the notes on using the tow fitting.◀
that the tow rope is taut.
Use of the tow fitting:
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses
on the vehicle components when towing, al‐ ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps. vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Use tow fitting located in the front only for
positioning the vehicle.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
252
Screw thread for tow fitting
Press on the mark of the cover to push it out.
Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
the transmission.
Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.
253
Mobility Care
Care
Vehicle features and options ▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 inches/80 cm.
specific and optional features offered with the Automatic car washes
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to Information
Note the following:
systems. The respectively applicable country ▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or
provisions must be observed when using the those that use soft brushes in order to
respective features and systems. avoid paint damage.
▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
damaged by the transport mechanisms.
Car washes ▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
may be damaged, depending on the width
General information of the vehicle.
Regularly remove foreign objects such as ▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to
leaves in the area below the windshield when page 78, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐
the hood is raised. vation.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in ▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐ be triggered by the interior motion sensor
age the vehicle. of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐
tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm,
Steam blaster and high-pressure refer to page 47.
washer
CAUTION
Information Too high guide rails in car washes can
damage body parts. There is risk of property
CAUTION
damage. Avoid car washes with guide rails
When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐ higher than 4 in/10 cm.◀
ers, components can be damaged due to the
pressure or temperatures being too high.
Different types of tires
There is risk of property damage. Maintain suf‐
ficient distance and do not spray too long con‐ CAUTION
tinuously. Follow the user's manual for the The vehicle might be too large for the car
high-pressure washer.◀ wash. There is risk of property damage. Before
driving into the car wash, make sure that the
Distances and temperature vehicle is not too large.◀
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals: 12 in/30 cm.
254
Care Mobility
Before driving into a car wash ▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a ice scraper.
car wash, take the following steps:
After washing the vehicle
1. Drive into the car wash.
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
2. Engage selector lever position N. briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
3. Deactivating Automatic Hold, refer to can be reduced and corrosion of the brake
page 75. discs can occur.
4. Release the parking brake. Completely remove all residues on the win‐
5. Switch the engine off. dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
In this way, the ignition remains switched wiper blade wear.
on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐
played.
CAUTION Vehicle care
Selector lever position P is automati‐
cally engaged when the ignition is Car care products
switched off. There is risk of property dam‐ The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
age. Do not switch ignition off in car using car care and cleaning products from
washes.◀ BMW.
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside WARNING
when in selector lever position N. A signal Cleansers can contain substances that
sounds when an attempt is made to lock the are dangerous and harmful to your health.
vehicle. There is risk of injuries. When cleaning the in‐
To start the engine: terior, open the doors or windows. Only use
products intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol‐
1. Depress the brake pedal.
low the instructions on the container.◀
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐ Vehicle paint
ping on the brake turns the ignition off.
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
Selector lever position areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
cally: fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
▷ When the ignition is switched off. quency and extent of your car care to these
influences.
▷ After approx. 15 minutes.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
Headlights grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
tered or discolored.
acidic cleansers.
▷ Soak areas that have been dirtied e. g., Leather care
from insects, with shampoo and wash off
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
with water.
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
255
Mobility Care
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime Chrome surfaces

chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
wear and premature degradation of the leather tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
surface. of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
To guard against discoloration, such as from ularly when they have been exposed to road
clothing, provide leather care roughly every salt.
two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐ Rubber components
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially Environmental influences can cause surface
more visible. soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. For
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and cleaning, use only water and suitable care
grease will gradually break down the protective products, the manufacturer of your vehicle rec‐
layer of the leather surface. ommends original BMW care products.
Suitable care products are available from a Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
dealer’s service center or another qualified care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
service center or repair shop. rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
car care products in order to avoid damage or
Upholstery material care noises.
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
Fine wood parts
If upholstery is very dirty, e.g., with beverage
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
with a suitable interior cleaner.
soft cloth.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the Plastic components
material vigorously.
These include:
CAUTION ▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of ▷ Roofliner.
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is
▷ Lamp lenses.
risk of property damage. Ensure that any Vel‐
cro® fasteners are closed.◀ ▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
Caring for special components ▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Light-alloy wheels
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not soak the roofliner.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam CAUTION
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐ Cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
turer's instructions. vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent plastic parts. There is risk of property damage.
components, such as the brake disk. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth
lightly with water.◀
256
Care Mobility
Safety belts Displays/Screens/protective glass of

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and the Head-up Display
thus have a negative impact on safety. CAUTION
WARNING Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
Chemical cleansers can destroy the any kind can damage the surface of displays
safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect and screens. There is risk of property damage.
of the safety belts. There is risk of injuries or Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.◀
danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution
CAUTION
for cleaning the safety belts.◀
The surface of displays can be damaged
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety with improper cleaning. There is risk of prop‐
belts clipped into their buckles. erty damage. Avoid pressure that is too high
Do not allow the switchs to retract the safety and do not use any scratching materials.◀
belts until they are dry.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Carpets and floor mats Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐
play using a microfiber cloth and commercially
WARNING available dish-washing soap.
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. Long-term
There is risk of an accident. Stow objects in When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
the vehicle such that they are secured and three months, special measures must be
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use taken. Further information is available from a
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and dealer’s service center or another qualified
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use service center or repair shop.
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, e.g. for cleaning.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐

rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.
257
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.

Reference Technical data
Technical data
Information
The technical data and specifications in this found in the approval documents, on labels on
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. the vehicle or can be obtained from a dealer’s
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, service center or another qualified service cen‐
for example, due to the selected special equip‐ ter or repair shop.
ment, country version or country-specific The information in the vehicle documents al‐
measurement method. Detailed values can be ways has priority.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,
model version, equipment or country-specific for example, due to the selected special equip‐
measurement method. ment, tires, load and chassis version.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for example, a roof antenna,
BMW X5
Width with mirrors inches/mm 86/2,184
Width without mirrors inches/mm 76.3/1,938
Height inches/mm 69.4/1,762
Length inches/mm 193.3/4,908
Wheelbase inches/mm 115.5/2,933
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 41.7/12.7
260
Technical data Reference
Weights
X5 sDrive35i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 6,069/2,753
Load lbs/kg 1,108/503
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,669/1,211
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,540/1,606
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100
Cargo area capacity cu ft 35.8-76.7
Canada: trunk capacity cu ft/liters 22.9-66/650-1,870
X5 xDrive35i
X5 xDrive50i
261
Reference Technical data
X5 xDrive35d
Capacities
US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. 22.4/85 Fuel quality, refer to

page 210
262
Appendix Reference
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐
hicle are listed here.
263
Reference Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A Alarm, unintentional 47 Automatic deactivation,
All around the center con‐ Front-seat passenger air‐
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ sole 16 bags 111
tem 137 All around the roofliner 17 Automatic headlight con‐
ACC, Active Cruise Control All around the steering trol 105
with Stop & Go 145 wheel 14 Automatic Hold 74
Acceleration Assistant, refer All-season tires, see Winter Automatic locking 45
to Launch Control 83 tires 224 Automatic recirculated-air
Accessories and parts 7 All-wheel-drive 139 control 169
Activated-charcoal filter 170 Alternating-code hand-held Automatic Soft Closing,
Active Blind Spot Detec‐ transmitter 175 doors 40
tion 133 Alternative oil types 234 Automatic tailgate 41
Active Cruise Control with Ambient light 108 Automatic transmission, see
Stop & Go, ACC 145 Animal detection, see Night Steptronic transmission 80
Active Protection 135 Vision 127 AUTO program, automatic cli‐
Active roll stabilization 141 Antifreeze, washer fluid 80 mate control 168
Active seat ventilation, Antilock Brake System, AUTO program, intensity 169
front 54 ABS 137 Auto Start/Stop function 71
Active Steering 141 Anti-slip control, see Average fuel consumption 98
Adaptive brake assistant 137 DSC 138 Average speed 98
Adaptive brake lights, see Approved axle load 261 Axle loads, weights 261
Brake force display 135 Arrival time 99
Adaptive Light Control 106 Ashtray 176 B
Additives, oil 234 Ashtray, front 176
Adjustments, seats/head re‐ Ashtray, rear 177 Backrest curvature, see Lum‐
straints 52 Assistance when driving bar support 53
After washing vehicle 255 off 137 Backrest, seats 52
Airbags 109 Assist system, see Intelligent Backrest, width 54
Airbags, indicator/warning Safety 118 Bad road trips 195
light 110 Attentiveness assistant 135 Band-aids, see First-aid
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐ AUTO H button 74 kit 249
culated-air mode 169 AUTO H button, refer to Au‐ Bar for tow-starting/
Air, dehumidifying, see Cool‐ tomatic Hold 74 towing 251
ing function 168 AUTO intensity 169 Battery replacement, vehicle
Air distribution, manual 169 Automatic car wash 254 battery 246
Air flow, automatic climate Automatic climate con‐ Battery replacement, vehicle
control 169 trol 167 remote control 35
Air outlets, see ventila‐ Automatic Cruise Control Battery, vehicle 246
tion 170 with Stop & Go 145 Belts, safety belts 57
Air pressure, tires 215 Automatic Curb Monitor 62 Beverage holder, cu‐
Alarm system 45 pholder 186
264
Everything from A to Z Reference
Biodiesel 211 Calling up steering wheel ad‐ Check Control 89

Blinds, sun protection 48 justment 45 Checking the engine oil level
BMW Advanced Diesel 211 Camera lenses, care 257 electronically 232
BMW Assist, see user's Camera, rearview cam‐ Checking the oil level elec‐
manual for Navigation, En‐ era 157 tronically 232
tertainment and Communi‐ Camera, Side View 161 Children, seating position 64
cation Camera, Top View 160 Children, transporting
BMW Driver’s Guide App 6 Can holder, see Cu‐ safely 64
BMW Homepage 6 pholder 186 Child restraint fixing sys‐
BMW Internet page 6 Car battery 246 tem 64
BMW maintenance sys‐ Car care products 255 Child restraint fixing system
tem 238 Care, displays 257 LATCH 66
Bonus range, ECO PRO 201 Care, vehicle 255 Child restraint fixing systems,
Bottle holder, see Cu‐ Cargo 196 mounting 65
pholder 186 Cargo area 181 Child safety locks 68
Brake assistant 137 Cargo area, enlarging 181 Child seat, mounting 65
Brake assistant, adaptive 137 Cargo area, storage compart‐ Child seats 64
Brake discs, break-in 192 ments 187 Chrome parts, care 256
Brake force display 135 Cargo cover 181 Cigarette lighter 177
Brake lights, adaptive 135 Cargo, securing 197 Cleaning displays 257
Brake lights, brake force dis‐ Cargo straps, securing Climate control 167
play 135 cargo 197 Climate control wind‐
Brake pads, break-in 192 Car key, see Remote con‐ shield 193
Braking, hints 193 trol 34 Clock 94
Breakdown assistance 248 Carpet, care 257 Closing/opening via door
Break-in 192 Car wash 254 lock 39
Brightness of Control Dis‐ Catalytic converter, see Hot Closing/opening with remote
play 101 exhaust system 193 control 37
Bulb replacement 241 CBS Condition Based Serv‐ Clothes hooks 187
Bulb replacement, front 242 ice 238 Coasting 203
Bulb replacement, rear 244 CD/Multimedia, see user's Coasting with engine decou‐
Bulbs and lights 241 manual for Navigation, En‐ pled, coasting 203
Button, RES 148 tertainment and Communi‐ Coasting with idling en‐
Button, Start/Stop 69 cation gine 203
Bypassing, see Jump-start‐ Center armrest 185 Cockpit 14
ing 249 Center console 16 Cold starting, refer to Starting
Central locking system 40 the engine 70
C Central screen, see Control Combination switch, refer to
Display 18 Wiper system 77
California Proposition 65 Changes, technical, see Own Combination switch, see Turn
Warning 8 Safety 7 signals 76
Calling up mirror adjust‐ Changing parts 240 Comfort Access 43
ment 45 Changing wheels 244 COMFORT program, Driving
Calling up seat adjust‐ Changing wheels/tires 223 Dynamics Control 143
ment 45 Chassis number, see vehicle Compact wheel, see Emer‐
identification number 10 gency wheel 244
265
Compartments in the Cruising range 94 Distance to destination 99

doors 184 Cupholder 186 Divided screen view, split
Compass 99 Current fuel consumption 94 screen 23
Compressor 225 Door lock 39
Condensation on win‐ D Door lock, see Remote con‐
dows 170 trol 34
Condensation under the vehi‐ Damage, tires 223 Doors, Automatic Soft Clos‐
cle 195 Data, technical 260 ing 40
Condition Based Service Date 94 Downhill control 140
CBS 238 Daytime running lights 106 DPC, see Dynamic Perform‐
Confirmation signal 45 Defrosting, see Windows, de‐ ance Control 137
ConnectedDrive, see user's frosting 170 Drink holder, third row of
manual for Navigation, En‐ Dehumidifying, air 168 seats 187
tertainment and Communi‐ Deleting personal data 24 Drive mode 142
cation Deletion of personal data 24 Drive-off assistant 137
ConnectedDrive Services Departure time, parked-car Drive-off assistant, see
Connecting electrical devi‐ ventilation 173 DSC 138
ces 178 Destination distance 99 Driving Dynamics Con‐
Continued driving with a flat Diesel exhaust fluid, at low trol 142
tire 114, 117 temperatures 212 Driving instructions, break-
Control Display 18 Diesel exhaust fluid, having in 192
Control Display, settings 100 refilled 212 Driving notes, general 192
Controller 19 Diesel exhaust fluid, on mini‐ Driving on bad roads 195
Control systems, driving sta‐ mum 212 Driving stability control sys‐
bility 137 Diesel exhaust fluid, replen‐ tems 137
Convenient opening with the ishing yourself 212 Driving tips 192
remote control 38 Diesel fuel 211 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
Coolant 236 Diesel particulate filter 193 trol 138
Coolant level 236 Digital clock 94 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
Coolant temperature 93 Dimensions 260 trol 139
Cooler 179 Dimmable exterior mirrors 62 Dynamic Performance Con‐
Cooling function 168 Dimmable interior rearview trol DPC 137
Cooling, maximum 168 mirror 63 Dynamic Stability Control
Cooling system 236 Direction indicator, see Turn DSC 138
Cornering light 106 signals 76 Dynamic Traction Control
Corrosion on brake discs 194 Display, electronic, instru‐ DTC 139
Cosmetic mirror 176 ment cluster 85
Courtesy lamps during un‐ Display in windshield 101 E
locking 37 Display lighting, see Instru‐
Courtesy lamps with the vehi‐ ment lighting 108 ECO PRO 200
cle locked 38 Displays 86 ECO PRO, bonus range 201
Cruise control 151 Displays, cleaning 257 ECO PRO display 200
Cruise control, active with Disposal, coolant 237 ECO PRO displays 87
Stop & Go 145 Disposal, vehicle battery 247 ECO PRO driving mode 200
Cruise Control, refer to Active Distance control, see ECO PRO mode 200
Cruise Control 145 PDC 154
266
ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐ Engine start, refer to Starting Fold-out position, wiper 79
struction 202 the engine 70 Foot brake 193
EfficientDynamics 202 Engine stop 70 Front airbags 109
Electronic displays, instru‐ Engine temperature 93 Front center armrest 185
ment cluster 85 Entering a car wash 254 Front cupholder 186
Electronic oil measure‐ Equipment, interior 174 Front-end collision warning
ment 232 Error displays, see Check with braking function 122
Electronic Stability Program Control 89 Front-end collision warning
ESP, see DSC 138 ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐ with City Braking func‐
Emergency detection, remote gram, see DSC 138 tion 119
control 35 Exchanging wheels/tires 223 Front fog lamps, , LED, bulb
Emergency release, fuel filler Exhaust system 193 replacement 244
flap 209 Exterior mirror, automatic Front fog lights 107
Emergency release, parking dimming feature 62 Front fog lights/cornering
brake 75 Exterior mirrors 61 lights, bulb replace‐
Emergency Request 248 External start 249 ment 243
Emergency start function, en‐ External temperature dis‐ Front lights 242
gine start 35 play 93 Front-seat passenger airbags,
Emergency unlocking, trans‐ External temperature warn‐ automatic deactivation 111
mission lock 83 ing 93 Front-seat passenger airbags,
Emergency wheel 244 Eyes for securing cargo 197 indicator lamp 111
Energy Control 94 Front seats 52
Energy recovery 95 F FTM Flat Tire Monitor 116
Engine, automatic Start/Stop Fuel 210
function 71 Failure message, see Check Fuel consumption, see Aver‐
Engine, automatic switch- Control 89 age fuel consumption 98
off 71 False alarm, see Unintentional Fuel filler flap 208
Engine compartment 229 alarm 47 Fuel gauge 93
Engine compartment, work‐ Fan, see Air flow 169 Fuel lid 208
ing in 230 Filler neck for engine oil 233 Fuel quality 210
Engine coolant 236 Fine wood, care 256 Fuel recommendation 210
Engine idling when driving, First-aid kit 249 Fuel, tank capacity 262
coasting 203 Fitting for towing, see Tow fit‐ Fuse 247
Engine oil 232 ting 252
Engine oil, adding 233 Flat tire, changing G
Engine oil additives 234 wheels 244
Engine oil change 234 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 116 Garage door opener, see Uni‐
Engine oil filler neck 233 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐ versal Integrated Remote
Engine oil temperature 93 tor TPM 112 Control 174
Engine oil types, alterna‐ Flat tire, warning Gasoline 210
tive 234 lamp 113, 117 Gear change, Steptronic
Engine oil types, suitable 234 Flooding 193 transmission 81
Engine start during malfunc‐ Floor carpet, care 257 Gear shift indicator 96
tion 35 Floor mats, care 257 General driving notes 192
Engine start, jump-start‐ Folding back rear seat back‐ Glare shield 176
ing 249 rests 181 Glasses compartment 186
267
Glass sunroof, refer to Panor‐ I Intensity, AUTO pro‐

amic glass sunroof 49 gram 169
Glove compartment 183 Ice warning, see External Interior equipment 174
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐ temperature warning 93 Interior lights 108
proved 261 Icy roads, see External tem‐ Interior lights during unlock‐
perature warning 93 ing 37
H Identification marks, tires 221 Interior lights with the vehicle
Identification number, see ve‐ locked 38
Handbrake, see Parking hicle identification num‐ Interior motion sensor 46
brake 73 ber 10 Interior rearview mirror, auto‐
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐ iDrive 18 matic dimming feature 63
nating code 175 Ignition key, see Remote con‐ Internet page 6
Hazard warning flashers 248 trol 34 Interval display, service re‐
HDC Hill Descent Con‐ Ignition off 69 quirements 95
trol 140 Ignition on 69 Interval mode 78
Head airbags 109 Indication of a flat
Headlight control, auto‐ tire 113, 117 J
matic 105 Indicator and alarm lamps,
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐ see Check Control 89 Jacking points for the vehicle
ture 105 Indicator lamp, see Check jack 244
Headlight flasher 77 Control 89 Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐
Headlight glass 242 Individual air distribution 169 sion 81
Headlights 242 Individual settings, see Per‐ Jump-starting 249
Headlights, care 255 sonal Profile 35
Head restraints 52 Inflation pressure, tires 215 K
Head restraints, front 58 Inflation pressure warning
Head restraints, rear 59 FTM, tires 116 Key/remote control 34
Head-up Display 101 Info display, refer to On- Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐
Head-up Display, care 257 Board computer 98 cess 43
Heavy cargo, stowing 197 Information 6 Key Memory, see Personal
High-beam Assistant 106 Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Profile 35
High beams 77 tor TPM 113 Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐
High beams/low beams, see Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor mission 81
High-beam Assistant 106 FTM 116 Knee airbag 110
Hill Descent Control Instrument cluster 85
HDC 140 Instrument cluster, electronic L
Hills 194 displays 85
Hill start assistant, see Drive- Instrument display, multifunc‐ Label on recommended
off assistant 137 tional 86 tires 224
Holder for beverages 186 Instrument lighting 108 Lamp in the exterior mirror,
Homepage 6 Integrated key 34 see Active Blind Spot De‐
Hood 230 Integrated Owner's Manual in tection 133
Horn 14 the vehicle 29 Lamp replacement 241
Hot exhaust system 193 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ Lamp replacement, front 242
HUD Head-up Display 101 quest 248 Lamp replacement, rear 244
Hydroplaning 193 Intelligent Safety 118 Lane departure warning 131
268
Lane margin, warning 131 M Menu in instrument clus‐

Language on Control Dis‐ ter 97
play 101 Maintenance 238 Menus, operating, iDrive 18
Lashing eyes, securing Maintenance require‐ Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐
cargo 197 ments 238 ing concept 20
LATCH child restraint sys‐ Maintenance, service require‐ Messages, see Check Con‐
tem 66 ments 95 trol 89
Launch Control 83 Maintenance system, Microfilter 170
Leather, care 255 BMW 238 Minimum tread, tires 223
LED headlights, bulb replace‐ Make-up mirror 176 Mirror 61
ment 243 Malfunction displays, see Mirror memory 60
LEDs, light-emitting di‐ Check Control 89 Mobile communication devi‐
odes 242 Malfunction, self-leveling sus‐ ces in the vehicle 193
Letters and numbers, enter‐ pension 142 Mobility System 225
ing 25 Manual air distribution 169 Modifications, technical, see
Light 104 Manual air flow 169 Own Safety 7
Light alloy wheels, care 256 Manual brake, see Parking Moisture in headlight 242
Light control 106 brake 73 Monitor, see Control Dis‐
Light-emitting diodes, Manual mode, Steptronic play 18
LEDs 242 transmission 82 Mounting of child restraint
Lighting 104 Manual operation, door systems 65
Lights and bulbs 241 lock 39 Moving sun visor 176
Light switch 104 Manual operation, exterior Multifunctional instrument
Load 197 mirrors 62 display 86
Loading 196 Manual operation, fuel filler Multifunction steering wheel,
Lock, door 39 flap 209 buttons 14
Locking/unlocking via door Manual operation, Park Dis‐
lock 39 tance Control PDC 155 N
Locking/unlocking with re‐ Manual operation, parking
mote control 37 brake 75 Navigation, see user's manual
Locking, automatic 45 Manual operation, rearview for Navigation, Entertain‐
Locking, settings 44 camera 157 ment and Communication
Lock, power window 48 Manual operation, Top Neck restraints, front, see
Locks, doors, and win‐ View 160 Head restraints 58
dows 68 Marking, run-flat tires 225 Neck restraints, rear, see
Low beams 104 Master key, see Remote con‐ Head restraints 59
Low beams, automatic, see trol 34 Neutral cleaner, see wheel
High-beam Assistant 106 Maximum cooling 168 cleaner 256
Lower back support 53 Maximum speed, display 96 New wheels and tires 223
Lower tailgate 43 Maximum speed, winter Night Vision 127
Low-Sulfur Diesel 211 tires 224 Night Vision device, see Night
Luggage rack, see Roof- Measurement, units of 101 Vision 127
mounted luggage rack 198 Medical kit 249 Nylon rope for tow-starting/
Lumbar support 53 Memory for seat, mirrors, towing 251
steering wheel 60
Menu, EfficientDynamics 202
269
O Overheating of engine, see Pressure warning FTM,

Coolant temperature 93 tires 116
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 239 Own Safety 7 Profile, see Personal Pro‐
OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐ file 35
agnosis 239 P Programmable memory but‐
Object detection, see Night tons, iDrive 24
Vision 127 Paint, vehicle 255 Protective function, glass
Obstacle marking, rearview Panoramic glass sunroof 49 sunroof 50
camera 158 Parallel parking assistant 163 Protective function, win‐
Octane rating, see Recom‐ Park Distance Control dows 48
mended fuel grade 210 PDC 154 Push-and-turn switch, see
Odometer 93 Parked-car ventilation 173 Controller 19
Office, see user's manual for Parked vehicle, condensa‐
Navigation, Entertainment tion 195 R
and Communication Parking aid, see PDC 154
Offroad trips 195 Parking assistant 163 Radiator fluid 236
Oil 232 Parking brake 73 Radio-operated key, see Re‐
Oil, adding 233 Parking lights 104 mote control 34
Oil additives 234 Parking with Automatic Radio ready state 69
Oil change 234 Hold 74 Radio, see user's manual for
Oil change interval, service Particulate filter 193 Navigation, Entertainment
requirements 95 Parts and accessories 7 and Communication
Oil filler neck 233 Passenger side mirror, tilting Rain sensor 78
Oil types, alternative 234 downward 62 Rapeseed-oil methyl ester
Oil types, suitable 234 Pathway lines, rearview cam‐ RME 211
Old batteries, disposal 247 era 158 Rear automatic climate con‐
On-board computer 98 PDC Park Distance Con‐ trol 171
On-board computer, refer to trol 154 Rear center armrest 185
On-board computer 98 Pedestrian detection, see Rear cooler 179
Onboard monitor, see Control Night Vision 127 Rear drink holder 186
Display 18 Pedestrian warning with city Rear lights 244
Onboard vehicle tool kit 240 braking function 125 Rear seats 55
Opening/closing via door Personal Profile 35 Rear ventilation, third row of
lock 39 Personal Profile, exporting seats, ventilation, third row
Opening and closing 34 profiles 36 of seats 171
Opening and closing, without Pinch protection system, Rearview camera 156
remote control 39 glass sunroof 50 Rearview mirror 61
Opening and closing, with re‐ Pinch protection system, win‐ Rear window defroster 170
mote control 37 dows 48 Recirculated-air mode 169
Operating concept, iDrive 18 Plastic, care 256 Recommended fuel
Optional equipment, standard Power failure 247 grade 210
equipment 7 Power windows 47 Recommended tire
Outside air, refer to Auto‐ Prescribed engine oil brands 224
matic recirculated-air con‐ types 234 Refueling 208
trol 169 Pressure, tire air pres‐ Remaining range 94
sure 215 Remote control/key 34
270
Remote control, malfunc‐ Safety belt reminder for driv‐ SET button, see Active
tion 39 er's seat and front passen‐ Cruise Control, ACC 145
Remote control, univer‐ ger seat 58 SET button, see Cruise con‐
sal 174 Safety belts 57 trol 151
Replacement fuse 247 Safety belts, care 257 Settings, locking/unlock‐
Replacing parts 240 Safety Package, see Active ing 44
Replacing wheels/tires 223 Protection 135 Settings on Control Dis‐
Reporting safety malfunc‐ Safety switch, windows 48 play 100
tions 10 Safety systems, airbags 109 Settings, storing for seat, mir‐
RES button 148 Saving fuel 199 rors, steering wheel 60
RES button, see Active Screen, see Control Dis‐ Shift paddles on the steering
Cruise Control, ACC 145 play 18 wheel 83
RES button, see Cruise con‐ Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐ Shift point indicator 88
trol 151 hicle tool kit 240 Shoulder support 54
Reserve warning, see Screw thread, refer to Screw Side airbags 109
Range 94 thread for tow fitting, screw Side View 161
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor thread for tow fitting 253 Signaling, horn 14
TPM 113 Sealant 225 Signals when unlocking 45
Residual heat, automatic cli‐ Seat belts, see Safety Sitting safely 52
mate control 169 belts 57 Size 260
Retaining straps, securing Seat heating, front 54 Ski and snowboard bag 182
cargo 197 Seat heating, rear 56 Slide/tilt glass roof 49
Retreaded tires 224 Seating position for chil‐ Smoker's package 176
RME rapeseed-oil methyl es‐ dren 64 Snow chains 228
ter 211 Seat, mirror, and steering Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
Roadside parking lights 105 wheel memory 60 nostics 239
Roller sunblinds 48 Seats 52 Sockets, see Connecting
RON recommended fuel Seats, front 52 electrical devices 178
grade 210 Seats, rear 55 Soot particulate filter 193
Roofliner 17 Seat ventilation, front 54 SOS button 248
Roof load capacity 261 Selection list in instrument Spare fuse 247
Roof-mounted luggage cluster 97 Spare tire, see Emergency
rack 198 Selector lever, Steptronic wheel 244
Rope for tow-starting/ transmission 81 Speed, average 98
towing 251 Self-leveling suspension, air Speed limit detection, on-
RSC Run Flat System Com‐ suspension 141 board computer 99
ponent, see Run-flat Self-leveling suspension, Speed limiter, display 96
tires 225 malfunction 142 Speed Limit Information 96
Rubber components, Sensors, care 257 Speed warning 100
care 256 Service and warranty 8 Split screen 23
Run-flat tires 225 Service requirements, Condi‐ SPORT+ - program, Dynamic
tion Based Service Driving Control 143
S CBS 238 Sport displays, torque dis‐
Service requirements, dis‐ play, performance dis‐
Safe braking 193 play 95 play 99
Services, ConnectedDrive
271
SPORT program, driving dy‐ SYNC program, automatic cli‐ Tone, see user's manual for
namics 143 mate control 169 Navigation, Entertainment
Sport program, transmis‐ and Communication
sion 82 T Tool 240
Stability control systems 137 Top View 159
Start/stop, automatic func‐ Tachometer 93 Total vehicle weight 261
tion 71 Tailgate, automatic 41 Touchpad 21
Start/Stop button 69 Tailgate via remote con‐ Tow fitting 252
Start function during malfunc‐ trol 38 Towing 251
tion 35 Tail lights 244 Tow lug, see Tow fitting 252
Starting the engine 70 Technical changes, see Own Tow-starting 251
Status control display, Safety 7 TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tires 113 Technical data 260 tor 112
Status information, iDrive 23 Telephone, see user's manual Traction control 139
Status of Owner's Manual 7 for Navigation, Entertain‐ TRACTION, driving dynam‐
Steering, Active Steering 141 ment and Communication ics 139
Steering wheel, adjusting 63 Temperature, automatic cli‐ TRACTION program, Dy‐
Steering wheel heating 63 mate control 168 namic Driving Control 143
Steering wheel memory 60 Temperature display for ex‐ Transmission lock, electronic
Steptronic Sport transmis‐ ternal temperature 93 unlocking 83
sion, see Steptronic trans‐ Temperature, engine oil 93 Transmission, see Steptronic
mission 80 Terminal, starting aid 250 transmission 80
Steptronic transmission 80 Text message, supplemen‐ Transporting children
Stopping the engine 70 tary 92 safely 64
Storage compartment on the Theft alarm system, see Tread, tires 222
center console 184 Alarm system 45 Triple turn signal activa‐
Storage compartments 183 Thermal camera, see Night tion 77
Storage compartments, loca‐ Vision 127 Trip odometer 93
tions 183 Thigh support 53 Trip on-board computer 99
Storage compartment third Third row of seats 56 Trip recorder, see Trip odom‐
row of seats 184 Tilt alarm sensor 46 eter 93
Storage, tires 224 Time of arrival 99 Turning circle lines, rearview
Storing the vehicle 257 Tire damage 223 camera 158
Suitable engine oil types 234 Tire identification marks 221 Turn signals, operation 76
Summer tires, tread 222 Tire inflation pressure 215
Sun visor 176 Tire inflation pressure moni‐ U
Supplementary text mes‐ tor, see FTM 116
sage 92 Tire Pressure Monitor Unintentional alarm 47
Surround View 156 TPM 112 Units of measurement 101
Suspension settings 142 Tires, changing 223 Universal remote control 174
Switch for Dynamic Driving Tire sealant 225 Unlock button, Steptronic
Control 142 Tires, everything on wheels transmission 81
Switch, refer to Cockpit 14 and tires 215 Unlocking/locking via door
Symbols 6 Tires, run-flat tires 225 lock 39
Symbols in the status field 23 Tire tread 222 Unlocking/locking with re‐
mote control 37
272
Unlocking, settings 44 Warning triangle 249 Wrench, see Onboard vehicle

Unpaved roads, cross-coun‐ Warranty 7 tool kit 240
try trips 195 Washer fluid 80
Updates made after the edito‐ Washer nozzles, wind‐ X
rial deadline 7 shield 79
Upholstery care 256 Washer system 77 xDrive 139
USB interface 179 Washing, vehicle 254 Xenon headlights, bulb re‐
Water on roads 193 placement 242
V Weights 261
Welcome lamps during un‐
Vanity mirror 176 locking 37
Variable steering 141 Welcome lights 105
Vehicle battery 246 Wheel cleaner 256
Vehicle battery, replac‐ Wheels, changing 223
ing 246 Wheels, everything on wheels
Vehicle, break-in 192 and tires 215
Vehicle care 255 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
Vehicle features and op‐ FTM 116
tions 7 Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
Vehicle identification num‐ tor TPM 112
ber 10 Window defroster, rear 170
Vehicle jack 244 Windows, powered 47
Vehicle paint 255 Windshield, climate con‐
Vehicle storage 257 trol 193
Vehicle wash 254 Windshield washer fluid 80
Ventilation 170 Windshield washer noz‐
Ventilation, see Parked-car zles 79
ventilation 173 Windshield washer sys‐
Venting, see ventilation 170 tem 77
Vent, see ventilation 170 Windshield washer system,
Vertical Dynamic Control 141 see washer/wiper sys‐
VIN, see vehicle identification tem 77
number 10 Windshield wiper 77
Voice activation system 26 Winter storage, care 257
Winter tires, suitable
W tires 224
Winter tires, tread 222
Warning and indicator lamps, Wiper 77
see Check Control 89 Wiper blades, replacing 240
Warning displays, see Check Wiper fluid 80
Control 89 Wiper, fold-out position 79
Warning lamp in the exterior Wiper system 77
mirror, see Active Blind Spot Wood, care 256
Detection 133 Word match concept, naviga‐
Warning messages, see tion 25
Check Control 89
273
More about BMW
The Ultimate
bmwusa.com Driving Machine®
01 40 2 963 410 ue
*BL296341000V*

2016 BMW x5 83039 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2016 BMW x5 83039 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contents Owner's Manual

A-Z The Ultimate

THE BMW X5.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 963 410 - VI/15

The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 963 410 - VI/15

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 963 410 - VI/15

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 963 410 - VI/15

Vehicle features and options Own safety

Event Data Recorder EDR

Vehicle identification formation about motor vehicle safety from

The vehicle identification number can be found

The vehicle identification number can also be

Reporting safety defects

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 963 410 - VI/15

All around the steering wheel

1 Rear window safety switch 48 Front fog lights 107

Automatic headlight con‐ 10 Instrument cluster 85

Night Vision, switch on/switch off

7 Steering column stalk, left Telephone, see user's manual for

Clean the windshields and head‐

Rear window wiper in Canadian

Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐

Cruise control, reduce dis‐

Cruise control rocker switch 151, 145 16 Adjust steering wheel 63

All around the center console

1 Control Display 18 9 Automatic Hold 74

Driving Dynamics Control 142

PDC Park Distance Control 154

11 Transmission selector lever 80

All around the roofliner

1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ 4 Reading lights 108

2 Panoramic glass sunroof 49 5 Interior lights 108

3 Indicator lamp, front-seat pas‐ 6 Glasses compartment 186

The concept 1 Control Display

2. "Turn off control display" 3. Move in four directions.

Controller with navigation system Buttons on controller

1. Turn. MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.

NAV Opens the Navigation menu.

TEL Opens the phone menu.

BACK Displays the previous display.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Controller without navigation system

The main menu is displayed.

Selecting menu items

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu

Press button Function

MENU Open the main menu.

Audio Open audio menu last listened 2. Press the controller.

Using interactive map and Internet

Move interactive map or Swipe into re‐

Display the menu or open Tap once.

6. Turn the controller to set the hours and Symbol Meaning

SIM card is blocked.

Status field Enter PIN.

Telephone symbols Split screen

Roaming is active. 1. Press button.

2. "Split screen" The function will work immediately. This

Deleting the button assignments

Saving a function General information

▷ Navigation, e.g. stored destinations. Switching between cases, letters and

Functional requirement or Tip controller up.

1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐